AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
Introduction
5
3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................48
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................48
Accessories................................................................................... 5
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................49
About this book ............................................................................ 5
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....50
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................50
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................50
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 Connecting other devices............................................................51
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................51
FEATURES
6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................51
7
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................52
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................53
AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................54
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) ........................................................................................................................ 12
Multi Position ................................................................................................................................................56
MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12
Angle/Height .................................................................................................................................................57
Part names and functions .............................................................13
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................57
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................60
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................63
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................63
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................64
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................65
PREPARATIONS
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................66
19
Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................66
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................67
General setup procedure ..............................................................19
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................72
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................74
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................74
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................74
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................41
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 41
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 43
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 44
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 46
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 47
En
2
PLAYBACK
75
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device ........................99
Connecting a USB storage device ................................................................................................................99
Basic playback procedure .............................................................75
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................100
Selecting an HDMI output jack .................................................................................................................... 75
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 103
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................76
Media sharing setup ...................................................................................................................................103
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 77
Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 107
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 77
Playback of Internet radio..........................................................................................................................107
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................78
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................109
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 79
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 110
Playback of PC music contents ..................................................................................................................104
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 82
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................110
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 83
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 112
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 83
Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................112
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................113
Listening to FM/AM radio
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................84
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................116
Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 118
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 84
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................118
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 85
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................118
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 85
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 119
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 87
Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................120
Listening to DAB radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................88
Control screen.............................................................................................................................................120
Settings screen............................................................................................................................................121
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 88
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 122
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 89
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................122
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 89
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................123
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 90
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 124
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 91
Listening to FM radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................93
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................124
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 93
CONFIGURATIONS
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93
129
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 94
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 95
Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 129
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................97
Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................130
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 97
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 132
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 98
En
Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................132
3
APPENDIX
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu).................................................................. 135
173
DSP Program menu items.......................................................................................................................... 136
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 173
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 138
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 174
Setup menu items ...................................................................................................................................... 139
First, check the following: ..........................................................................................................................174
Speaker (Manual Setup) ............................................................................................................................ 142
Power, system and remote control ...........................................................................................................174
Sound.......................................................................................................................................................... 147
Audio ...........................................................................................................................................................176
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 149
Video............................................................................................................................................................178
HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 151
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) .....179
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)....................................................................179
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 154
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................180
Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 155
USB and network ........................................................................................................................................181
Function...................................................................................................................................................... 158
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 183
ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 160
Glossary .................................................................................... 184
Language .................................................................................................................................................... 161
Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................184
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ............... 161
Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................186
Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 162
HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................186
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 163
Network information ..................................................................................................................................187
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 164
Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................187
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 164
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 188
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 164
Supported devices......................................................................................................................................188
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 165
File formats .................................................................................................................................................188
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 165
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 165
Video signal flow........................................................................ 189
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 165
Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................189
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 166
Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 190
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 166
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 190
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 166
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................190
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 167
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................192
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 167
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................192
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 167
Trademarks............................................................................... 193
Controlling external devices with the remote control ................... 168
Specifications............................................................................ 194
Registering the remote control code for a TV........................................................................................... 168
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices.................................................................... 169
Resetting remote control codes ................................................................................................................ 170
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 172
En
4
Introduction
Accessories
About this book
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
# AM antenna
The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3070 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
# YPAO microphone
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
# Microphone base
Pole
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
# Power cable
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
# Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
# CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
En
5
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
En
6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.80)
Various wireless connection
methods (p.66)
Connecting various devices (p.41)
By processing front left and front right sound fields
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
camcorders, and other devices.
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
without router.
dynamic sound effects.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.41)
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.74)
PL
Presence L
Sound field
PR
Presence R
Sound field
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Low power consumption (p.161)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
Video from external
device
SL
Surround L
Sound field
SR
Surround R
Sound field
Image of sound field processing
En
7
power consumption.
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
using CINEMA DSP.
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
Capability for reproducing reflections
Level
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En
8
YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C.
YPAO 3D measurement
In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence
of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.
speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the
maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level
Compensation
Time
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so
Level
High
that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
Low
YPAO Volume ON
YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency
High
En
9
Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.
High-resolution music enhancer
High-quality video processing
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as
content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the
a high-quality image (p.149).
musicality in the original content (p.127).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
Before processing
Loudness
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Frequency
After processing
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
Frequency
En
10
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.112) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp
(The following shows examples of use.)
expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3070 only)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the
By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an
speakers of a different room.
11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
En
11
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with
MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
cable connections between AV receiver and source devices
link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you
compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
through the various settings such as speaker connections,
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
commands and playback source.
TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the
other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
speaker system.
select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
Functions
MusicCast compatible devices.
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
Functions
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
Functions
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance
• Selecting and playing back various content
• Playback control (including music selection for some
with illustrations)
– Play back music from your mobile device
• Viewing owner’s manual
– Select an Internet radio station
X
X
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google
Play.
Play.
sources)
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En
12
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a
b
c
d
e
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SCENE
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1
2
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
3
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
f
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.151)
1A
YPAO MIC
L
SILENT CINEMA
AUDIO
R
g
HDMI IN
h
f INPUT knob
Opening the front panel door
Selects an input source.
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
g Front panel door
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
h VOLUME knob
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
Adjusts the volume.
• Standby Through is enabled (p.152)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.153)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.154)
c Front display
Displays information (p.15).
d Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
e PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.83).
En
13
■ Inside of the front panel door
a
b
cd e
ON SCREEN
OPTION
fg
h
ij
SCENE
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1
2
3
kl
m
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
n
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
o
a ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.124).
d DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.123).
e TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of
output sounds (p.125).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.82).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.74).
g PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.78).
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
p
q
L
AUDIO
HDMI IN
R
r
i MULTI ZONE keys
(U.S.A. model)
m PRESET keys
ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.116).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.116).
j INFO (WPS) key
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.90, p.94) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.86)
(other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.118).
n TUNING keys
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.68).
k MEMORY key
Select the radio frequency (p.85).
o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.99).
p YPAO MIC jack
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.85, p.89,
p.93).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.118).
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.85).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.89, p.85).
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.76).
En
14
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.54).
q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
r VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
(p.47).
Front display (indicators)
a bc
d
e
h
f g
j
i
k
ECO
VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.
ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY
2
3
4
IN OUT 1 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
lmn
o
p
q r
a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.161).
c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.171)
d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
e ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.116).
f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
station signal (other models).
g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.117).
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR
rs
h Information display
t
u
s VIRTUAL
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.122).
i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.79), or the virtual surround
processing (p.81) is working.
t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.125) is working.
l Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.66).
m Bluetooth indicator
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.97).
n Hi-Res
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.127) is working.
N Front presence speaker (R)
M Rear presence speaker (L)
o CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.79) is working.
< Rear presence speaker (R)
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)
p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) is working.
q SLEEP
u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.125).
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
r Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
En
15
Rear panel
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
j
k
l
m
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
i
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
B
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
PR
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
L
AV 2
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
1
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
n
o
p
(RX-A3070 U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
En
16
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
q
a PHONO jacks
o ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3070)
For connecting to a turntable (p.46).
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).
b AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.46).
ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2070)
AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3070 only)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113).
p SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.46).
For connecting to speakers (p.20).
c AV 1-4 jacks
q PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44).
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).
d HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.41). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.44), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.114).
e COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.45).
f HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44).
g TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.51).
h REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.115).
i NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.50).
j Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.66) and a Bluetooth connection (p.97).
k RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
l VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.51).
m AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.51).
n ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.48).
En
17
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter
a
Transmits infrared signals.
SOURCE
b
b RECEIVER z key
RECEIVER
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
AV
c
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.169). This key lights
up in orange after pressed.
AUDIO
PHONO
3
BLUETOOTH
4
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.169). This
key lights up in green after pressed.
TUNER
d
e
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
f
PROGRAM
g
TOP MENU
h
3
MUTE
p
q
4
VOLUME
r
s
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
i
t
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
u
k
l
m
n
MODE
TUNING
MUSIC
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV CH
MUTE
CODE SET
v
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices
when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.169).
Select a sound mode (p.78).
l INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122).
m SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
n Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.85, p.89, p.93).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.118).
o TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.168).
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.75).
q PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.117).
r VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
s MUTE key
g External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.169).
Mutes the audio output.
t OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.124).
u DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.123).
v CODE SET key
h ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
(RX-A3070)
PRESET: Select a preset station.
TUNING: Select the radio frequency.
p HDMI OUT key
Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen page,
the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings (p.158).
INPUT
TV VOL
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source)
TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio
f PROGRAM keys
TV
o
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1-4 (RX-A3070): AUDIO 1-4 jacks
AUDIO 1-3 (RX-A2070): AUDIO 1-3 jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks
Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.76).
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
c Input selection keys
e SCENE keys
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Turns on/off an external device.
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.116).
PRESET
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.85).
BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).
k Sound mode keys
SOURCE z key
d ZONE switch
BAND
j
j Radio keys
i Menu operation keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
En
18
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote
control (p.168).
X
To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote
control code for each device before using (p.168).
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.48)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.50)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.66)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.74)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
19
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type
R
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
2
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
9
3
9
5
4
10°~30°
Front (L/R)
12
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
45
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
67
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
ER
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Rear presence (L/R)
TY
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
10°~30°
Subwoofer 9
T
Y
Function
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
6
7
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
En
20
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room
7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
X
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
E
R
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
1
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
2
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
9
layout” (p.26).
3
9
4
5
T
Y
6
7
X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.79).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.53).
• (RX-A3070 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.
En
21
5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers)
7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the
sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back
surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for
speakers.
enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E
E
R
R
1
1
9
4
3
9
9
5
3
9
4
5
6
T
2
2
7
Y
X
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
YPAO (p.53).
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup”
menu before performing YPAO (p.53).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En
22
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)
7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.53).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En
23
5.1 system
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
1
2
4
9
5
3
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.53).
En
24
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)
2.1 system
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
E
R
1
9
2
3
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.53).
En
25
Presence speaker layout
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
environment.
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.
Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and
Y
listening position
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).
En
26
■ Setting the speaker impedance
When using four presence speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
2
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position
3
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
speakers
Caution
4
5
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
En
27
■ Connecting speakers
Speakers to be connected
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Speaker type
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.
7.2.2/5.2.4
7.1/5.1.2
5.1
2.1
Front (L/R) 1 2
(
(
(
(
Center 3
(
(
(
Surround (L/R) 4 5
(
(
)*5
)*1
)*3
Front presence (L/R) E R
(
)*4
)*6
Rear presence (L/R) T Y
)*2
(
(
Surround back (L/R) 6 7
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
Subwoofer 9
(
(
If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
speakers (*2).
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).
X
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.145) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
(rear panel and screws).
AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
+
–
then check the speaker cables short circuit.
+
–
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
En
28
Connecting speaker cables
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
The unit
(rear)
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
1
confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
2
FRONT
SURROUND
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACK
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
2
3
Loosen the speaker terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
E
R
1
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
+ (red)
+
2
3
FR
ON
T
1
2
4
9
3
9
– (black)
Using a banana plug
4
5
T
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
Y
6
1
Tighten the speaker terminal.
2
Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
7
1
+
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
2
Y
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
PRE
OUT
(SING
LE)
(FR
ONT)
1
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BACK
SUBW
OOFE
R
SURR
OUN
CENT
ER
D BA
CK
L
En
29
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Bi-amp connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
Power-amp channel expansion
(Example)
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
En
30
■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-A2070)
Main zone
(RX-A3070)
Output
channel
(max)
Main zone
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
7
External
speakers
External power
amplifier
(required)
Surround back
32
+1 room
7.2.2 +1Zone
32
+2 rooms
7.2 +2Zone
33
Rear presence
7.2.4 [ext.RP]
33
Front
7.2.4 [ext.Front]
34
Surround back
Surround back
11
Front presence
Page
7.2 +1Zone
Front presence
7
Power Amp Assign
(p.142)
+1 room
Surround back
9
Multi-zone
7
Front presence
11
Surround back
Surround back
9
Front presence
7
Surround back
7
)
Surround back
7
)
Front presence
7
)
Surround back
11
)
Surround back
9
)
Front presence
Front presence
Rear presence
Front
Front
+1 room
+2 rooms
+1 room
Front presence
Rear presence
Rear presence
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]
34
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.142)
Page
+1 room
7.2 +1Zone
32
+1 room
7.2.2 +1Zone
32
+2 rooms
7.2 +2Zone
33
Front
+1 room
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
Front
+2 rooms
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
35
External power
amplifier
(required)
Surround back
Front presence
7
Surround back
Surround back
9
Front presence
7
Rear presence
External
speakers
Surround back
9
Surround back
11
Bi-amp
Surround back
7
)
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp
36
7
)
Front presence
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
36
7
)
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
37
+1 room
Y
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.53).
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
35
7.2 Bi-Amp
36
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
36
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
37
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
37
5.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.RP]
38
En
SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.
31
7.2 +1Zone
7.2.2 +1Zone
E
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
9
3
4
2
1
5
6
7
7
Zone2
Zone2
Main zone
Speaker
2
9
3
4
5
6
R
Main zone
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 1
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En
32
7.2 +2Zone
7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)
1
1
2
E
2
R
1
9
2
9
3
3
9
4
5
9
Zone2
4
6
5
7
1
2
via
external amp
T
Y
6
Main zone
7
via
external amp
Zone3
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
X
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
When Zone3 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).
En
33
7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)
via external amp
E
R
E
R
via external amp
via external amp
1
2
3
9
1
9
4
T
Speaker
9
4
Y
6
3
9
5
2
5
T
Y
via
external amp
7
Connect to
6
Speaker
7
via
external amp
Connect to
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
ER
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY
EXTRA SP 2
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).
En
34
7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone
via external amp
via external amp
R
E
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
9
3
6
5
6
7
2
9
3
4
5
4
1
2
Zone2
7
1
Zone2
Main zone
2
Main zone
Zone3
Speaker
Speaker
Connect to
Connect to
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
En
35
7.2 Bi-Amp
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E
1
9
2
3
1
9
4
9
5
6
Speaker
R
4
2
3
9
5
7
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
(not used)
ER
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 2
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
En
36
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E
R
via external amp
via external amp
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
3
4
3
9
9
4
5
6
2
5
7
Zone2
T
Y
via
external amp
6
7
via
external amp
Main zone
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Speaker
X
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).
En
37
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp
E
R
1
9
4
2
3
9
5
T
Y
via
external amp
via
external amp
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 2
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).
En
38
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53).
When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu
The unit (rear)
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53).
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
The unit (rear)
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
SINGLE
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
4
6
3
9
5
7
Zone2 or Zone3
9
1
4
2
Main zone
5
Zone2 or Zone3
X
X
• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142)
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.113).
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En
39
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
(Example)
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
V2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
Main input jack
Caution
TRIGGER
OUT
NT VIDEO
PB
PR
1
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
MAIN IN
OUT
PR
2
PB
RS-232C
PR
PRE OUT
UT
(SINGLE)
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
(FRONT)
1
L
L
2
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
3/
NCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
SPEAKERS
ROUND
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
FRONT
R
R
FRONT
L
SUR
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
AV 2
)
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PR
PB
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
B
Y
AV 2
PR
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
1
2
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
a b c de
f
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
a F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.142).
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
b R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)
• With unbalanced inputs
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.142).
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
c FRONT jacks
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
Output front channel sounds.
d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En
40
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.99).
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
AV 1
Component video cable
HDMI cable
O
T VIDE
ONEN
COMVP 1
PB
A
Y
PR
A
COAXIAL jacks
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
AV 1
Video pin cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3
En
41
Stereo pin cable
XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable(male)
IO
AUD
4
R
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.
About the XLR jacks
The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR
jacks are compatible with the pin assignments.
2. HOT
1. GND
3. COLD
En
42
X
Connecting a TV
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
■ HDMI connection
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.190).
cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Y
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.44).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
The unit
(rear)
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
HDMI input
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
HDMI
VIDEO
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
HDMI
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
R
R
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
(2 TV)
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
FRONT
L
L
L
L
R
R
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
R
TV
1 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
En
43
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
remote control (p.75).
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
HDMI
HDMI OUT 2 jack
Y
HDMI OUT
The unit
(rear)
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
(ZONE OUT)
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
ARC
TV
(p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
X
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
VIDEO
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
HDMI
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
AUDIO 4
R
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
SURROUND
HDMI input
FRONT
HDMI
L
■ HDMI connection
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
AM
The unit (rear)
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
Projector
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
I OUT
NE
CP2.2)
1
ARC
TV (already connected)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 4
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
Y
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1
A
PR
PB
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
HDMI output
OUT
2
B
Y
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
AV 2
PR
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
HDMI
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
1
HDMI
2
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
HDMI
CENTER
SPEAKERS
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.114).
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
A
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En
44
■ Component video connection
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
output jacks available on your video device.
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Input jacks on the unit
Audio
Video
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Audio
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Component video
Composite video
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
Digital optical
AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit (rear)
PR
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
AV 1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(1 BD/DVD
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 4
AV 1
AV 1
A
(1 BD/DVD)
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
PR
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
(SINGLE)
R
(FRONT)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
Y
PB
PR
AV
Y
A
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
Video output
(composite video)
V
AV
ZONE OU
L
VIDEO
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
V
R
L
R
PB
E
R
AUDIO 4
R
Y
AUDIO 4
R
COM
CENTER
S
R
AUDIO 1
R
2
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
PHONO
L
1
PR
GND
AV 4
B
Video output
(component video)
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO 1
AV 3
VIDEO
PR
PB
B
PHONO
L
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
R
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
A
(1 BD/DVD)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
C
C
C
C
COAXIAL
ZONE 2/Z
COAXIAL
L
O
Video device
L
L
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
OPTICAL
L
R
R
Video device
O
L
L
R
R
R
R
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2 on the remote control, the video/audio played
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
En
45
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO jacks
PHONO
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
L
L
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
L
Y
L
R
R
R
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
Ground lead
GND
setting (p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,
R
The unit (rear)
GND
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
6) jacks to another input source.
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
• (RX-A3070 only)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
Turntable
VIDEO
Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
C
C
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.42).
COAXIAL
R
R
X
O
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
AUDIO 4
R
L
L
OPTICAL
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
SURROUND
O
FRONT
FM
AM
L
L
R
R
R
Audio output jacks on audio device
Digital coaxial
Audio device
Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
XLR
Digital optical
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
XLR
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
XLR
Analog stereo (RCA)
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
Analog stereo (XLR)
AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3070 only)
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
XLR
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3070 only
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En
46
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
■ Analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
ENTER
Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage
ZONE 2
RETURN
device” (p.99).
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
L
unit.
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
R
The unit (front)
■ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
HDMI
Audio device
The unit (front)
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.
Game console
X
If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs audio
input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Camcorder
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
En
47
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
Assembling the AM antenna
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
Hold down
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
A
Insert
Release
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
1
R
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
2
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
PR
PB
AV 2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
1
X
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
The unit (rear)
En
48
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PR
PB
1
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
VIDEO
IN
2
B
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
AV 2
PR
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
1
2
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
ANTENNA
DAB/FM
(4 RADIO)
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
75ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En
49
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
Y
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
software or firewall settings appropriately.
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.66).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Router
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 6
AV 7
AC IN
Mobile device
TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
REMOTE
IN
RS-232C
Y
OUT
2
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.152).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.
En
50
5 Connecting other devices
6 Connecting the power cable
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a
The unit (rear)
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 7
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug
AC IN
GGER
OUT
REMOTE
cable.
.1A
TAL
IN
RS-232C
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V240V
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Trigger In
(+12V)
Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)
110V120V
ERS
TRIGGER
OUT
DMI (HDCP2.2)
SP2
NCE
L
R
CENTER
L
FRONT
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
1
AV 7
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
RS-232C
F.PRESENCE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
OUT
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
2
2
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
1
2
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
CENTER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
to an AC wall outlet.
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
NETWORK
System
connector
jack
( 3 NET )
AC IN
Yamaha
subwoofer
OTE
RS-232C
To an AC wall outlet
OUT
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.159) in the “Setup”
menu.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
En
51
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
2
AUDIO
PHONO
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,
3
cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
X
SCENE
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the
from the unit.
ZONE
1
5
4
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
PRESET
MOVIE
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
X
BAND
MODE
TUNING
6
7
TV CH
CODE SET
En
52
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
6
manually before performing YPAO.
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select
“Power Amp Assign” (p.142), then select your speaker system.
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30)
AUDIO
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !
CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
“Surround” (p.143), then select “Front”.
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)
ZONE
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
2
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
TV
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front
Presence” (p.144), then select your front presence speaker
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
layout.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout
X
in “Rear Presence”.
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
4
5
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
then “Manual Setup”.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
TV CH
CODE SET
En
53
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
MAIN 2 3 4
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
X
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
ZONE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
SCENE
1
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.
TUNER
4
4
YPAO MIC
jack
for acoustic perfection.
Y
VOLUME
YPAO MIC
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
TOP MENU
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
E
R
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
OPTION
1
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
ENTER
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
RETURN
DISPLAY
The unit (front)
RETURN
9
– Do not connect headphones.
2
3
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
1
2
X
TV
MUTE
4
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
YPAO
5
microphone
from the unit.
INPUT
TV VOL
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Ear height
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
TV CH
CODE SET
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
The following screen appears on the TV.
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En
54
5
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
If desired, select the measuring options.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.56) or
“Angle/Height” (p.57) and press ENTER.
AV
2
AUDIO
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Y
If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.
ZONE
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
SCENE
1
2
3
4
measurement.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.60)
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.57)
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
55
Multi Position
Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Selects multi measure or single measure.
a
d
e
bac
Settings
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.
En
56
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
b
c a e
d
c
a b
d
Angle/Height
SOURCE
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
RECEIVER
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the measurement.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Y
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
“Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
3
1
4
Settings
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
“Measure” and press ENTER.
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Yes
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.
No (default)
Disables the angle/height measurement.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
finishes.
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
MUSIC
Proceed to Step 3.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
start the measurement immediately.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
BAND
MODE
TUNING
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
TV CH
CODE SET
En
57
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
SOURCE
3
Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
Microphone
base
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
2
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
Perform the angle/height measurement.
1
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
DISPLAY
Y
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
PRESET
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
Microphone base
4
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
5
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
positions “2” and “3”.
En
58
6
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
SOURCE
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
VOLUME
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
5
OPTION
RETURN
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
TV
TV VOL
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.
X
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.63).
INPUT
MUTE
3
X
TV CH
CODE SET
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.
6
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En
59
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
SOURCE
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
positions.
following screen appears automatically.
Y
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
MAIN 2 3 4
SCENE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
Proceed to Step 5.
“Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).
ZONE
1
When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.
RECEIVER
AV
1
3
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
4
1
VOLUME
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
TOP MENU
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
start the measurement immediately.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
X
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
BAND
MODE
TUNING
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
PRESET
the first position finishes.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
En
60
Proceed to Step 4.
4
SOURCE
1
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
4
Perform the angle/height measurement.
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
2
AUDIO
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
5
VOLUME
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
3
OPTION
Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
Microphone base
6
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
position “1”.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Microphone
base
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
En
61
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
5
SOURCE
ENTER.
RECEIVER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
6
TUNER
To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
DISPLAY
X
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
7
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
the measurement results” (p.63).
AUDIO
8
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
X
AV
MAIN 2 3 4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
TV CH
CODE SET
X
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.
En
62
Checking the measurement results
SOURCE
Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(Horizontal)
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
Height
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Result” and press ENTER.
AUDIO
3
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position
To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
X
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu,
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
which displays the previous measurement results.
ZONE
1
2
3
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
The following screen appears.
SCENE
4
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
a
ON SCREEN
b
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
c
a Measurement result items
MODE
2
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
b Measurement result details
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,
and then “Result” (p.138).
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
TUNING
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Polarity of each speaker
TV CH
CODE SET
Wiring
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Size
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
En
63
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1: No Front SP
Front speakers are not detected.
E-2: No Sur. SP
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers
are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-11: No R.PRNS SP
One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
En
64
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.63) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.63) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.63) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
En
65
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to control the
Selecting the connection method
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
unit.
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless
Internet
Direct)” (p.72).
Wireless router
Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.50) or the wireless
network connection (p.67).
Modem
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.67).
Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.72).
En
66
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
SOURCE
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74)
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Select a connection method according to your environment.
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.67)
7
• Using other connection methods (p.69)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
SCENE
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Connection” and press ENTER.
ZONE
1
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.68)
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
4
5
6
3
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
4
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
ON SCREEN
wireless router.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.
X
BAND
– Network settings
MODE
TUNING
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
PRESET
– Bluetooth settings
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
– Account information for the network services
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
X
8
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
TV VOL
MUTE
Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
TV
INPUT
TV CH
CODE SET
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share
Press ON SCREEN.
En
67
9
SOURCE
After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.
Y
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
AUDIO
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
10 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
VOLUME
the Wi-Fi screen.
TOP MENU
OPTION
RETURN
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
BAND
MODE
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
The name of the unit
11 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
Tap here to start setup
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
3
the front display.
DISPLAY
TUNING
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
point).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
TV CH
CODE SET
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
En
68
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
2
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
SCENE
2
3
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
Y
4
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
MUSIC
3
4
5
6
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
3
4
TV
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.67).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.70).
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
7
Manual Setting
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
PIN Code
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
The following connection methods are available.
unit via HDMI.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
ZONE
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
wireless network settings.
AV
1
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
8
TV CH
CODE SET
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En
69
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.70).
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.71).
Searching for an access point
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
access points appears on the TV screen.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
1
AUDIO
Setting up the wireless connection manually
security key for your network.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
1
access point and select “NEXT”.
MAIN 2 3 4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
TUNER
ZONE
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
2
DISPLAY
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
BAND
MODE
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
TV CH
CODE SET
connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
70
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
3
SOURCE
2
5
6
Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
and select “NEXT”.
RECEIVER
access points appears on the TV screen.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
AV
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
3
4
7
V-AUX
to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
hexadecimal digits.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
2
64 hexadecimal digits.
HDMI OUT
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
3
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
4
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
wireless router (access point).
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
3
ON SCREEN
OPTION
press ENTER to start the connection process.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
4
the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
press ENTER to start the connection process.
PRESET
connection method.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
the TV screen.
3
4
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
71
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
SOURCE
AV
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
AUDIO
PHONO
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
Direct” and select “OK”.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
1
7
Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
to the unit without permission.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
8
Y
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
unit via HDMI.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
1
2
4
TV CH
CODE SET
3
4
5
6
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
Connection” and press ENTER.
Y
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.
En
72
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
and select “NEXT”.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed
instruction manual of the mobile device.
to Step 10.
1
Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
2
Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
AUDIO
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
access points.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
3
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
4
TV CH
CODE SET
The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a
mobile device.
En
73
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE
2
3
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
X
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
4
room and play them back simultaneously.
MUTE
3
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
products, visit the Yamaha website.
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PROGRAM
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
SCENE
1
1
2
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
OPTION
MusicCast CONTROLLER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
CONNECT
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
4
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
TV
INPUT
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
5
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.154) in the
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
En
74
“Setup” menu.
PLAYBACK
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Basic playback procedure
AUDIO
Input selection keys
1
On-screen input selection
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
a Press ON SCREEN.
player) connected to the unit.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
HDMI OUT
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
MUTE
VOLUME
2
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
ENTER.
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
OPTION
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Cursor keys
ENTER
pages.
ENTER
RETURN
signal output changes.
PRESET
MUSIC
only) (p.88)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
9
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.93)
OUT 1+2
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)
TV
TV VOL
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99)
TV CH
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
INPUT
MUTE
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
Russia models) (p.84)
MODE
TUNING
1
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
DISPLAY
BAND
MOVIE
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
CODE SET
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)
Off
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• Listening to Internet radio (p.107)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110)
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.76).
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
X
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL
on the front panel (p.125).
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.157), you can turn on/off each
zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
En
75
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SOURCE
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
RECEIVER
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
AUDIO
The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
Press SCENE.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1
SCENE (SCENE key)
SCENE
HDMI Output
AV 1
AUDIO 1
NET RADIO
TUNER
Audio Select (p.128)
Auto
Auto
-
-
HDMI Output (p.75)
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
DSP Program (p.78)
Sci-Fi
STRAIGHT
9ch Stereo
9ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.148)
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Enhancer (p.83)
Off
On
On
On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.127)
On
On
On
On
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Mode
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
X
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.132).
3
4
On-screen scene selection
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
4
Input (p.75)
Input
ON SCREEN
3
2
TV CH
CODE SET
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.
En
76
Registering a scene
SOURCE
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
AUDIO
1
1
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
Input selection keys
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display.
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
assignments in “Detail” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,
Subwoofer Trim
Video
Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Volume
Master Volume
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
SCENE1
SET Complete
HDMI OUT
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
SCENE
3
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
If you want to control the corresponding playback device
after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding
SCENE key and input selection key together for more than
3 seconds.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
VOL.
OPTION
ENTER
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.169) to register it.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
9
X
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device
connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
type in “Device Control” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
77
X
When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
assigned.
Selecting the sound mode
SOURCE
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
RECEIVER
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
AUDIO
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
and press ENTER.
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
HDMI OUT
ZONE
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.79).
SCENE
1
2
3
X
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
4
PROGRAM.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
PROGRAM
ON SCREEN
OPTION
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“DSP Program” menu (p.135).
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
music sources or stereo playback (p.80).
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
DISPLAY
BAND
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
MODE
TUNING
the “Information” menu (p.161).
Selecting a surround decoder
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
2-channel sources (p.82).
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
Switching to the straight decode mode
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
TV
(p.82).
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Switching to the Pure Direct mode
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
• Press PURE DIRECT.
• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.83).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.83).
En
78
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
Enhanced
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category
MUSIC
HD 3
CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
X
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.148) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the
rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
79
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
En
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
80
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
STEREO
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
9ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Y
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.81) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.
En
81
Enjoying unprocessed playback
SOURCE
1
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
RECEIVER
processing.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
AUDIO
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SCENE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
1
VOLUME
Press STRAIGHT.
bDsur
Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
played.
Neural:X
Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
TOP MENU
or disabled.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
STRAIGHT
ENTER
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
RETURN
DISPLAY
Y
BAND
MODE
TUNING
SUR.DECODE
PRESET
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.82).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
TV CH
CODE SET
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.81) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
4
VOL.
Auto
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
ZONE
1
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Y
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby
Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround
X
processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.136).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.184).
En
82
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
quality.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
1
ZONE
2
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
4
PURE DIRECT
PROGRAM
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
SCENE
1
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
R
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.127) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
Y
POP-UP/MENU
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
OPTION
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
ENTER
modes.
VOL.
L
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
1
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
RETURN
Press ENHANCER.
enabled or disabled.
DISPLAY
– Using the multi-zone function
BAND
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enhancer On
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
Hi-Res ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
“ENHANCER” lights up
PURE DIRECT
3
4
ENHANCER
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
TV
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
– DSD audio
CODE SET
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.127) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
En
83
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio
Setting the frequency steps
stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Y
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation
on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.S.A. model.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
4
5
En
84
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
SOURCE
1
2
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
FM 87.50MHz
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
preset numbers.
X
VOL.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
HDMI OUT
“Auto Preset” (p.96).
ZONE
3
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
■ Registering a radio station
about a second to search stations automatically.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
1
OPTION
FM 98.50MHz
ENTER
STEREO TUNED
RETURN
tune into the desired radio station.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
TUNING
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
Y
X
CODE SET
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
Preset number
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
TV CH
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
2
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
BAND
MODE
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.85) to
VOL.
DISPLAY
BAND
MUTE
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
TUNER
TUNER
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
En
85
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
AUDIO
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
TUNER
TUNER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
HDMI OUT
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
3
Preset
4
STEREO TUNED
PROGRAM
MUTE
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
VOLUME
Y
TOP MENU
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
ENTER
RETURN
X
DISPLAY
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96).
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Numeric keys
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
86
Operating the radio on the TV
SOURCE
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
1
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
TUNER
c
b
■ Playback screen
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
a
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
AUDIO
MAIN 2 3 4
■ Browse screen
b
a
4
a Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
c
VOLUME
b Preset number
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(FM/AM) and frequency.
Menu
MODE
TUNING
b TUNED/STEREO indicators
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
TV
Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Utility
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
Menu
1 Page Up
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
CODE SET
En
87
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models only)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
1
2
3
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
3
4
7
V-AUX
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
4
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
AUDIO
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
perform an initial scan.
1
2
3
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
Y
SCENE
2
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
HDMI OUT
ZONE
1
transmission method.
Preparing the DAB tuning
performed an initial scan yet.
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
4
Init Scan
Press [ENTER]
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
PROGRAM
MUTE
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
VOLUME
WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
TOP MENU
ON
SCREEN
3
X
POP-UP/MENU
OPTION
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.48).
Init Scan
>>>------- 30%
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
VOL.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
BAND
MODE
VOL.
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
DAB
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
TV
TV VOL
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
4
INPUT
MUTE
BBC Radio 4
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
TV CH
CODE SET
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.91).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
En
88
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
SOURCE
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
RECEIVER
scan.
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
2
3
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
BAND
PRESET
DAB 2
PRESET
1
2
TUNING
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.89) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
BBC National
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
VOL.
X
4
2
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
SLEEP
1
Secondary station
BAND
TUNING
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
available.
DISPLAY
INFO
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
MODE
MUSIC
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
VOL.
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
ENTER
MOVIE
BBC Radio 4
Daily Service
Y
OPTION
RETURN
preset numbers.
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
X
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
DAB
POP-UP/MENU
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Preset number
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
MEMORY
Preset
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Preset
En
89
02:Empty
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Displaying the DAB information
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
AUDIO
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SCENE
2
3
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
into a DAB radio station.
1
2
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
station.
ZONE
1
1
2
3
Info
Program Type
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
4
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
PRESET:01
VOLUME
Item name
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
ENTER
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
Y
OPTION
DAB
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN
DISPLAY
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
3
Classic FM
Classic Music
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.87).
MOVIE
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
VOL.
4
TV
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
En
90
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
SOURCE
RECEIVER
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
100 [best]).
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
OPTION
1
2
3
4
5
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
DISPLAY
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
DAB channel label
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Reception strength
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
91
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency
Channel label
Frequency
Channel label
174.928 MHz
5A
225.648 MHz
12B
176.640 MHz
5B
227.360 MHz
12C
178.352 MHz
5C
229.072 MHz
12D
180.064 MHz
5D
230.784 MHz
13A
181.936 MHz
6A
232.496 MHz
13B
183.648 MHz
6B
234.208 MHz
13C
185.360 MHz
6C
235.776 MHz
13D
187.072 MHz
6D
237.488 MHz
13E
188.928 MHz
7A
239.200 MHz
13F
190.640 MHz
7B
192.352 MHz
7C
194.064 MHz
7D
195.936 MHz
8A
197.648 MHz
8B
199.360 MHz
8C
201.072 MHz
8D
202.928 MHz
9A
204.640 MHz
9B
206.352 MHz
9C
208.064 MHz
9D
209.936 MHz
10A
211.648 MHz
10B
213.360 MHz
10C
215.072 MHz
10D
216.928 MHz
11A
218.640 MHz
11B
220.352 MHz
11C
222.064 MHz
11D
223.936 MHz
12A
En
92
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
SOURCE
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
RECEIVER
from registered radio stations.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Y
AUDIO
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
antennas.
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Selecting a frequency for reception
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
1
2
POP-UP/MENU
“Auto Preset” (p.96).
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
■ Registering a radio station
Press BAND to select the FM band.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
FM 87.50MHz
OPTION
VOL.
1
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
BAND
TUNING
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.93) to
tune into the desired radio station.
DISPLAY
MODE
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
4
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
3
PRESET
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
PRESET
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
TUNING
about a second to search stations automatically.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
3
4
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Numeric keys
MEMORY
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
FM 98.50MHz
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
STEREO TUNED
CODE SET
number.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
Preset number
Preset
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
X
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
Preset
STEREO TUNED
En
93
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Radio Data System tuning
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
1
2
3
HDMI OUT
SCENE
2
3
many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System
data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and
Press BAND to select the FM band
“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
4
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM
MUTE
Preset
VOLUME
STEREO TUNED
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in
station.
station.
ZONE
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
station.
Y
OPTION
X
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
ENTER
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.96).
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting
DISPLAY
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96).
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
STEREO TUNED
9
Numeric keys
TV VOL
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Item name
TV
INPUT
MUTE
Info
Program Type
TV CH
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
CODE SET
displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
Information
En
94
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Operating the radio on the TV
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
AUDIO
PHONO
3
BLUETOOTH
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
4
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
■ Playback screen
Y
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
4
b
a
仮画面
VOLUME
c
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(DAB/FM) and frequency.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
PRESET
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.94), the Radio
Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
b TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
TV
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
c Operation menu
CODE SET
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
En
95
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
RECEIVER
a
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
c
AUDIO
b
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
a Preset station list
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
4
b Preset number
VOLUME
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
Submenu
Function
Memory
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
Utility
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
En
96
Playing back music via Bluetooth
SOURCE
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
RECEIVER
smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
BLUETOOTH
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
The unit
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
VOLUME
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
2
OPTION
The unit
ENTER
RETURN
the unit) from the available device list.
Bluetooth speakers/
headphones
DISPLAY
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
Y
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.154) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
displayed on the TV.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.50).
X
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
(p.188).
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
En
97
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
SOURCE
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
RECEIVER
AV
1
4
Input selection keys
played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
TUNER
• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
2
3
Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to
X
select an input source.
The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.
5
Press ON SCREEN.
While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” !
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
“OK”.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the
TV CH
CODE SET
unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.
En
98
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
Connecting a USB storage device
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).
X
1
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
USB storage device
USB
Connected
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
En
99
Playback of USB storage device contents
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
and start playback.
displayed.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
USB
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
2
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
X
VOLUME
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
hold down RETURN.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
X
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
displayed.
PRESET
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
TV CH
CODE SET
En
100
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
a
b
c
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Playback screen
a
b
c
e
AUDIO
d
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
SCENE
1
4
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
b Playback information
b List name
VOLUME
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Menu
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Function
1 Page Up
TV
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
En
101
control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
SOURCE
device contents.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
2
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
SCENE
2
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
ZONE
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
AUDIO
X
4
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
3
Item
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
PRESET
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Repeat
(Repeat)
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
4
Function
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
102
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Y
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.50). You can check whether
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”
settings.
(p.152) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure
the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1
2
3
4
5
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
En
103
Playback of PC music contents
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
playback.
displayed.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
NET
1
source.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
X
VOLUME
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
during playback, playback stops automatically.
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
MODE
TUNING
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
X
BAND
PRESET
playback screen is displayed.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
9
3
4
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
104
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
a
b
c
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Playback screen
a
b
c
e
AUDIO
d
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
SCENE
1
4
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
b Playback information
b List name
VOLUME
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
Menu
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Function
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1 Page Up
TV
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
TV VOL
MUTE
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
INPUT
10 Pages Down
TV CH
X
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
CODE SET
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
En
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.131).
105
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
SOURCE
music content.
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
2
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
SCENE
2
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
ZONE
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
AUDIO
X
4
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
3
Item
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
PRESET
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Repeat
(Repeat)
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
4
Function
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
106
Listening to Internet radio
SOURCE
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
RECEIVER
Playback of Internet radio
Y
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.50). You can check
1
2
3
4
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
AUDIO
NET
1
source.
the unit in “Network” (p.152) in the “Information” menu.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
ZONE
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
SCENE
1
2
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
3
4
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
2
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
BAND
PRESET
playback screen is displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
En
107
■ Browse screen
SOURCE
a
b
c
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Playback screen
a
b
c
e
AUDIO
d
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
a Playback indicator
a Playback indicator
b List name
b Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
PROGRAM
MUTE
VOLUME
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
d Item number/total
OPTION
e Operation menu
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Add to favorites
Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.109).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
BAND
Menu
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Add to favorites
(Remove from
favorites)
Function
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the
“Favorites” folder (p.109).
4
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
TV VOL
MUTE
10 Pages Up
TV CH
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
CODE SET
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
TV
INPUT
X
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
En
108
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
SOURCE
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
RECEIVER
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
screen.
X
AUDIO
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.118).
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
1
VOLUME
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
press ENTER.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Browse screen
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
En
109
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
(wired or wireless)
1
Router
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
The unit
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)
(wired or wireless)
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
iOS 10 (example)
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
Y
2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
“Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
3
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
Select a song and start playback.
X
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.121).
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.153) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.154) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.131) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
En
110
■ Playback screen
SOURCE
a
b
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
c
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
a Playback indicator
SCENE
1
2
3
4
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.
PROGRAM
MUTE
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
VOLUME
c Operation menu
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Menu
Screen Off
Function
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
111
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Video (HDMI)
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
Guest room
(Zone2)
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
Connections
TV: p.114
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.114
En
112
Preparing the multi zone system
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Caution
The unit (rear)
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
VIDEO
B
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
(SINGLE)
(F
SUR. BACK
(R
SUB
L
R
R
2 OPTICAL
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
FRONT
L
SURROUND
R
SURROUND
ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE
DIO 4
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies
ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
L
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
R
“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39).
AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Y
(RX-A3070 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.156) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En
113
X
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the
HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Zone2 - Audio Output” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.39).
Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
(Zone4).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
Y
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
unit with an HDMI cable (p.44).
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen menu operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI OUT
2
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
(HDCP2.2)
AV 3
AV 1
HDMI
HDMI (HDCP
(ZONE
OUT)
AV 3
AV 2
AV
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PB
PR
PB
PR
VIDEO
B
1
AUDIO 2
Y
AUDIO 3
)
AV 2
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
(SINGLE)
R
CAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
AUDIO 4
SURROUND
FRONT
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK
R
SURROU
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157)
in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
En
114
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
X
REMOTE
To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
device before using (p.168).
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET
1
1
ARC
AV 2
DVD)
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
NETWO
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
Infrared signal
receiver
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AV 1
A
PR
PB
1
IN
OUT
2
Y
AV 2
REMOTE
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
B
OUT
PR
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
Remote control
1
2
AXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
5ȍ
FM
AM
SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
En
115
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
SOURCE
RECEIVER
RECEIVER z
AV
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Input selection keys
1
2
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Press RECEIVER z.
pages.
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
disabled.
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
ZONE
indicator lights up in the front display.
SCENE
1
2
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Y
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110)
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing
in the main zone.
X
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
• Listening to Internet radio (p.107)
• You can also use the web control (p.119) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99)
Y
“SERVER”.
PRESET
only) (p.93)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
RETURN
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)
“Multi-zone output” (p.190).
ENTER
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.88)
4
3
PROGRAM
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models) (p.84)
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
HDMI OUT
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.
TUNER
ZONE
4
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
TV CH
CODE SET
Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.119) or AV CONTROLLER (p.12).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.117).
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
En
116
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The following functions are also available when the zone you want to
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that
operate is enabled.
is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
AUDIO
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
party.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
VOLUME
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
VOLUME
TOP MENU
X
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
display.
an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
POP-UP/MENU
MUTE
RETURN
DISPLAY
Setting the sleep timer
in the “Setup” menu.
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
Y
off).
Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
3
4
Press ENHANCER.
SLEEP
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.157)
OPTION
ENTER
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
SCENE
down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only
ON
SCREEN
1
Press SCENE.
TV CH
CODE SET
En
117
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
SOURCE
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
RECEIVER
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
shortcut numbers.
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
X
AUDIO
MAIN 2 3 4
Recalling a registered item
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
AV
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.109).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
ZONE
1
2
2
3
4
Registering an item
PROGRAM
MUTE
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1
2
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
Memory Preset
01:Empty
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
Memory Preset
02:Empty
CODE SET
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74) on your mobile device.
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
INPUT
MUTE
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric
TV CH
Y
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
VOL.
X
TV
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
Shortcut number (flashes)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Numeric keys
MEMORY
VOL.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
Press MEMORY.
DISPLAY
TV VOL
Recall Preset
01:USB
VOLUME
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
TOP MENU
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.
SCENE
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
118
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
X
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.
Web browser
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.121) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.
Web control
Web control
• If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.153), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction
(wired or wireless)
PC
manual.
(wired or wireless)
Router
The unit
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,
Y
iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12).
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.121) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 11.x
– Safari 9.x
1
2
Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
En
119
Top menu screen
Control screen
c
a
e
a
f
b
c
d
d
e
g
b
f
a PLAY INFO
a CONTROL
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
b TOP MENU
b STATUS
Moves to the top menu screen.
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
c SCENE
c SETTINGS
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
Moves to the settings screen.
d POWER
d PARTY MODE
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
Turns on/off the party mode (p.117).
e VOLUME
e SYSTEM POWER
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
f MAIN VOLUME
f RELOAD
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
for volume adjustment.
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Y
g RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.
En
120
Settings screen
Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.
b BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
c RELOAD
a
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
b
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.
c
a Rename
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154) or the name of each zone (p.155). Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
Network
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
Selects the network connection method (p.152) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.152). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.110). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.153) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.153).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En
121
Viewing the current status
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently
AV 1-7
selected) on the front panel display or TV.
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO 1-4*1
Switching information on the front display
TUNER
1
ZONE
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
Info
Audio Decoder
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TUNER (DAB)
Bluetooth
information appears.
USB
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
SERVER
AirPlay
Information
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
INFO
3
4
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2)
* (U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.94).
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
AV1
†‡ Dsur
DISPLAY
MUSIC
TUNER (FM/AM)
Item name
POP-UP/MENU
MOVIE
Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various
4
VOLUME
ON
SCREEN
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2)
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)
display items.
SCENE
1
Item
PHONO
AUDIO
MAIN 2 3 4
Currently input
source
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.90) for details.
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2)
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
also be applied separately to each input source group.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
*1 AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
*2
The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no
audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
122
Viewing the status information on the TV
SOURCE
1
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
AUDIO
Input source/
Party mode status
Compressed Music
Enhancer/Hi-Res
mode status
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound mode
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
4
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Audio format/
Decoder
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
DISPLAY
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
En
123
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is
Option menu items
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
X
during playback.
1
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Front display
Option
Tone Control
• Default settings are underlined.
Item
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SW
SR
SBL
SBR
TV screen
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
Dialogue
(Dialog)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
X
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
En
124
Page
125
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
125
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
125
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
126
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
126
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
126
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
126
Lipsync Adjustment
(Lipsync Adj.)
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)
126
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
126
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
127
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
127
Video Mode
(V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
127
Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
127
Item
Function
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
128
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
audio connection is made for one input source.
128
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
128
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
128
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Page
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
sounds even at low volume.
Settings
88
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device
(p.102) or media server (p.106).
-
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device
(p.102) or media server (p.106).
-
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
91
Off (Off)
Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)
Enables YPAO Volume.
X
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.54).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Settings
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
Y
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
volume.
X
Output level
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
On
Off
Input level
En
125
Volume: high
Output level
Volume: low
You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL
On
Off
Input level
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
■ Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
X
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
Setting range
0 to 3
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
X
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
X
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Settings
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.79) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Ideal position
En
126
Off (Off)
Disables Extra Bass.
On (On)
Enables Extra Bass.
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Video Mode (V.M)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83).
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
X
settings configured in “Processing” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83).
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
Settings
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.147)
in the “Setup” menu.
Others: Off (Off)
X
Y
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
Settings
1 to 6
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Enables the high-resolution mode.
On (On)
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
En
127
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Configures the input settings.
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
X
Settings
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
source.
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Auto (Auto)
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO
AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
En
128
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En
129
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Item
Function
Page
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon.
130
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
131
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
131
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
131
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
(RX-A3070 only)
Balance Input Attenuator
Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to
avoid sound distortion.
(RX-A3070 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
131
6
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
X
Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.
X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital
input jack is assigned) is selected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
131
En
130
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Decoder Mode
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
(RX-A3070 only)
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
“DTS”.
avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Input sources
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.46).
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
Auto
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Settings
Bypass
Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB)
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Input sources
AirPlay
(RX-A3070 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Settings
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB
and mute).
Input source
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network
sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Off
Enables the jitter elimination function.
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
X
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.
En
Disables the jitter elimination function.
131
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
5
6
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.76) using the TV screen.
1
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Item
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q).
Function
Page
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
132
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
133
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon.
134
Reset
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
134
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.
X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.77).
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
En
132
■ Load
Check or uncheck
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.
Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Choices
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI
Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.
Input
Input (p.75), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
(p.128)
*1 Only when “TUNER” is selected
*2
Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected
Default
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.75)
SCENE3-12: Off
Mode
DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.148), Enhancer (p.83), Enhancer Hi-Res
Mode (p.127)
Y
Sound
Tone Control (p.125), YPAO Volume (p.125), Adaptive DRC (p.125), Extra Bass
(p.126)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.148), Dialogue Lift (p.126), Dialogue Level (p.126),
Subwoofer Trim (p.126)
To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190).
Detail
Video
Video Mode (p.149), Video Adjustment (p.127)
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
Volume
Master Volume (p.75)
assigned to the selected scene.
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.147), Delay (p.147)
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.142), PEQ Select (p.146)
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
the assignments for SCENE4.
X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.
En
133
■ Rename/Icon Select
Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when
pressing SCENE
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Y
■ Setup procedure
Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.
1
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.
When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.
3
If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.76) for the selected scene.
En
134
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
6
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En
135
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DSP Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
1.0 s to 5.0 s
X
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Reverb Delay
0 ms to 250 ms
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item
Decode Type
Function
Selects a surround decoder to be used in
combination with the selected sound
program.
0% to 100%
Settings
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6
Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
The following items are available when you select “9ch Stereo”.
Item
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
DSP Level
Initial Delay
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.
Level
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to reduce
it.
Adjusts the entire volume.
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume
balance.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume
balance.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Function
Settings
-5 to 0 to +5
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front side, and
lower to enhance the rear side.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.
1 ms to 49 ms
0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume balance
using the presence speakers.
Higher to enhance the upside, and
lower to enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not produce
sounds when “Height Balance” is set
to “0”.)
0.1 to 2.0
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables monaural sound
Off, On
output.
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to
reduce it.
X
Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.
En
136
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to
“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type
bDsur
Neo:6 Music
Item
Function
Settings
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread
the center channel signals
to left and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Select “On” to spread center channel
signals to left and right if you feel the
center sound is too strong when
2-channel source is played.
Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field.
Off, On
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En
137
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
2
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
En
138
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
54
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
142
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
142
Selects a speaker system.
142
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
143
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
143
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
143
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
144
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
144
Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
144
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
144
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.
145
Power Amp Assign
Speaker
Page
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
Auto Setup
Configuration
Manual Setup
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Layout
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
145
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
146
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
146
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
146
En
139
Menu
Item
Lipsync
Sound
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
147
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
147
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
147
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
147
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volumes.
148
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
148
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
148
Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
148
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
148
Virtual Presence Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.
148
Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
148
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).
149
Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.
149
(RX-A3070 only)
HDMI
Network
Page
Delay Enable
DAC Digital Filter
Video
Function
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
149
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
151
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
152
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
152
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
152
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
152
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
153
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
153
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
154
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
other devices of the network.
154
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
154
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
97
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
154
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
155
Device Search
Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter.
98
Audio Receive
Bluetooth
Audio Send
En
140
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
155
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
156
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volume.
156
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
156
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3.
156
Zone2 Set
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
156
Zone3 Set
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
156
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
156
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
157
Balance
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
157
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
157
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
157
Main Zone Set
Multi Zone
Zone4 Set
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
157
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.
157
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
158
Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
158
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
158
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
158
Function
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
159
Trigger Output1
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
159
Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
159
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
160
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
160
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
161
Select an on-screen menu language.
161
ECO
Language
En
141
Speaker (Manual Setup)
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
X
Default settings are underlined.
Pattern1 ▶ 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
■ Setting Pattern
Settings
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Basic
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
7.2 +1Zone
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
7.2.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
• Distance
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
• Level
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
7.2 +2Zone
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 [ext.RP]
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
(RX-A3070 only)
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
7.2.4 [ext.Front]
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
En
142
Center
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2 Bi-Amp
Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37).
None
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP]
Surround
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers,
and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37).
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
(RX-A3070 only)
Settings
Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
■ Configuration
Select this option for small speakers.
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
Small
X
None
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output
from the corresponding speakers.
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
En
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
Large
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
143
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
Rear Presence
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Settings
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None
Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large x2
X
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
Small x1
Small x2
None
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
and its phase.
Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Settings
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Use
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
None
Settings
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
X
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
En
144
Layout
Rear Presence
Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Surround
Settings
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.81) works in this case.
Rear Height
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to “None”.
X
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Subwoofer
Front Presence
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
Settings
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Monaural x2
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
En
145
■ Level
4
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Settings
Manual
5
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
an item.
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
X
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
6
Setup” have already been saved (p.54). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
■ Test Tone
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.54) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
En
146
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
Sound
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
Configures the audio output settings.
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.
■ Lipsync
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
X
Delay Enable
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
fine adjustment.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*
■ Dynamic Range
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
Settings
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
signals) playback.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Settings
Auto/Manual Select
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto
Setting range
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En
147
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
■ Max Volume
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3
Sets the limit value of the volume.
functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Settings
■ Initial Volume
Off
Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP HD3.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Virtual Presence Speaker
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
presence speakers (p.79).
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.83).
Off
Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Settings
Auto
Video Off
X
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
En
148
Video
■ DAC Digital Filter
(RX-A3070 only)
Configures the video output settings.
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
sounds.
Settings
Sharp Roll-off Type
Slow Roll-off Type
Short Latency Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
■ Video Mode
■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
Settings
contents.
Direct
Settings
Processing
Disable
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable
Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
X
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to
Resolution
“Enable”.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.165) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
En
149
Aspect
Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Setting range
0 to 50
Settings
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
X
Setting range
0 to 50
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Adjustment
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
X
Contrast
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.
Adjusts the video contrast.
■ Setup procedure
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
150
HDMI
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.192) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
■ HDMI Control
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.190).
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables HDMI Control.
Off
On
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Default
AUDIO 1
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
En
151
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Network
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
Configures the network settings.
X
• The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) is set to “Main”.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT
2 jack.
Settings
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
■ Network Connection
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
Selects the network connection method.
Y
Settings
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.50).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.67).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.72).
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby
indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
■ IP Address
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
En
152
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
■ Manual network settings
■ MAC Address Filter
1
2
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
3
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
Filter
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Settings
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
X
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
AirPlay (p.110) and DMC (p.131) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
Settings
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
Off
On
value.
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.
Auto
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
En
153
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.97).
Settings
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
■ Audio Receive
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
Off
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth Standby
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Settings
Off
On
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.153) is set to “Off”.
En
154
Multi Zone
■ Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.
Configures the multi zone settings.
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.98).
Settings
Off
Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
En
155
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Audio Delay
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.
Volume
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
Mono
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.142).
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Enhancer
Max Volume
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
Settings
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
X
Tone Control
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or
Initial Volume
Zone3 output.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Settings
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
Auto
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
En
156
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Extra Bass
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone4
Settings
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On
Enables Extra Bass.
X
For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).
Zone2 - Audio Output
Balance
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
to “Zone2”.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
On
Enables the audio output.
Off
Disables the audio output (video output only).
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Party Mode Set
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.117) for each zone.
(p.155).
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
■ Zone4 Set
Settings
Configures the Zone4 settings.
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
(p.155).
En
157
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Function
■ Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
DSP Program
Selection
Select a sound program.
INPUT Selection
Select an input source for playback.
NET Selection
Select a network source.
Preset Selection
Select a registered item (shortcut).
Browse Screen 1 Page Up/Down
Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.
Subwoofer Trim
Adjust the subwoofer volume.
Dialogue Level
Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.
qRepeat / wShuffle
Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
2
Y
Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.161) is set to “On”.
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
En
158
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
Settings
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Choices
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Target Zone
switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Trigger Mode
Settings
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main
Settings
Power
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Zone2
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
Zone3
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
Zone4
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
All
Settings
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
En
159
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
ECO
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
En
160
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Settings
X
Off
If new firmware is available,
Disables the eco mode.
(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).
On
Enables the eco mode.
Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
161
Types of information
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
You can check the following information in the Information menu.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Audio Signal
Interface
TV interface
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
Format
Channel
Input
Output
Audio format of the input signal
■ Network
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
Displays the network information on the unit.
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
IP Address
X
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
specifications and settings of the playback device.
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.
■ Video Signal
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog)
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154)
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection
SSID
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Network Name
Wired/Wireless
Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Signal
IP address
En
162
The status of the wired or wireless connection
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID
The SSID of the wireless network
Security
Security method
Security Key
Security key
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
MAC address
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection
Network Connection
“Wireless Direct” indication
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.165)
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type (p.165)
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.164)
Tuner Freq. Step
PROGRAM
3
4
5
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.165)
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the
“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.171).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Volume
The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network,
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
En
163
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)
X
Default settings are underlined.
SPEAKER IMP.
8¬MIN
Item
Function
SPEAKER IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
164
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
164
connected.
REMOTE ID
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
165
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
Page
Settings
165
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
165
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
165
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.
166
DTS MODE
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
166
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.
166
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
167
FIRM. UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
167
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
167
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
REMOTE SENSER
ON
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
En
164
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF
Turns off the remote control sensor.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
TV FORMAT
NTSC
ID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Settings
ID1, ID2
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
MONITOR CHECK
YES
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.149)
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
Settings
Settings
FM100/AM10
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
En
165
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS
MODE)
4K MODE
MODE 1
DTS MODE
MODE 1
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
Settings
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
unit supports.
MODE 1
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
Settings
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
MODE 1
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
Format
Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
MODE 2
MODE 1
8 bit
12 bit
8 bit
10 bit
RGB 4:4:4
,
-
-
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
-
-
4K/60, 50 Hz
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
10 bit
MODE 2
12 bit
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:0
,
,
-
RGB 4:4:4
,
,
-
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
,
1
Y
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
process.
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Choices
Ethernet.
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
En
166
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
VERSION
x.xx
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Choices
X
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.163) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).
En
167
Controlling external devices with the remote control
SOURCE
SOURCE
RECEIVER
1
2
5
6
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such
as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the
AV
3
4
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
SOURCE blinks twice.
Y
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID
PARTY
HDMI OUT
is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
3
4
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the
codes again.
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
VOLUME
OPTION
devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work
RETURN
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control
twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
■ TV operations
DISPLAY
Registering the remote control code for a
TV
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can
control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source
selected on the unit.
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
Press TV z.
depending on the specification of the external device.)
ENTER
MUTE
3
4
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks
Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the
input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible
ON
SCREEN
the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2.
code.
X
POP-UP/MENU
Press CODE SET.
external device.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
2
TV CH
CODE SET
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
TV z
CODE SET
INPUT
registered its remote control code.
X
TV operation keys
Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE
Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL
Adjust the volume of the TV.
You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys
(p.169). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV
TV CH
Switch the channels of the TV.
(this function may not be available on some TV models).
TV z
Turns on/off the TV.
1
See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find your
TV’s remote control code.
X
If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
En
168
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
SOURCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
V-AUX
AUDIO
Input selection keys
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you
input source or scene.
have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input
X
selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the
remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the
input selection keys.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
PARTY
1
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
4
device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You
device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the
See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find the
remote control code for your playback device.
X
VOLUME
By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external
can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external
HDMI OUT
ZONE
Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback
device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the
RECEIVER
AV
■ Playback device operations
remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s
built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER and the external device after pressing
SOURCE.
SOURCE z
Turns on/off the playback device.
If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
that does not work, try the other codes.
External device
operation keys
Menu operation keys
ENTER
Cursor keys
2
Menu operation
keys
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
RETURN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
3
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
TV
TV operation keys
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Switches information on the display.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
Displays the pop-up menu.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
Press the input selection key.
External device
operation keys
h
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control
j
code.
CODE SET
Returns to the previous screen.
the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2.
playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.
4
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for the
Numeric keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Select an item.
Displays the top menu.
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
f
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks
g
twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
X
Skips forward/backward.
Numeric keys
Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys
Control the TV (p.168).
For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
Y
“Registering a scene” (p.77).
These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device
and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
En
169
Resetting remote control codes
SOURCE
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AUDIO
Input selection keys
key.
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1.
ZONE
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
TOP MENU
2
3
4
VOLUME
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the input selection key.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
OPTION
ENTER
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
RETURN
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Numeric keys
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
CODE SET
En
170
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
SOURCE
New firmware that provides additional features or product
RECEIVER
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
V-AUX
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
Note
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.167).
SCENE
1
2
PROGRAM
3
MUTE
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
AV
4
1
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
“START” and press ENTER.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
VOLUME
Read the on-screen description.
The firmware update is complete.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
X
X
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
SETUP” menu (p.167).
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware
be displayed in the “System” screen (p.163). You can update the unit’s firmware by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
update is available via the network.
BAND
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
Information icon
ON SCREEN is pressed.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
(mail icon)
appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will
TV CH
CODE SET
Message
System Icon
En
171
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
SOURCE
RECEIVER
z
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
V-AUX
4
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
3
ZONE
2
To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor
Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
The following message is displayed on the front display.
SCENE
1
Read the on-screen description.
keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
Firmware update indicator (flashes)
PROGRAM
MUTE
TOP MENU
NETWORK
UPDATE:ENTER
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
X
OPTION
The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
minutes after Step 3.
4
To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
X
• To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.
TV CH
CODE SET
En
172
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
speaker settings again (p.54). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.142).
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
the short messages.
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.148). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.156).
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.160).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.148). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
Zone3 (p.156).
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.165).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
“Option” menu (p.128).
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
En
173
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1
2
3
The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage.
again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.160).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.164).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.161).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)
En
174
Problem
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.164).
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in
green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.168). Even if the remote control code is registered
properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
En
175
Audio
Problem
No sound.
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.148).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.146).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.143).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.146).
The volume cannot be increased.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.146).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu
to “Use” (p.144).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.
TV audio is selected as the input source.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
En
176
Problem
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
Cause
Remedy
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.41).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.151).
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.151). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit
with HDMI).
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled.
Set “Zone2 - Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.157).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.161).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is distorted.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to
(p.114).
internal circuitry switching.
En
177
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.165).
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
in the “Information” menu (p.162). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.192).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO
AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.44).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.75).
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
The video is interrupted.
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due (p.114).
to internal circuitry switching.
En
178
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
(p.128).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.85).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.85).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations. Register AM radio stations manually
(p.85).
Auto Preset has been used.
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.
Cause
Remedy
An initial scan has not been performed.
Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.88).
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.
No DAB radio sound.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.
En
179
Try the station later or select another station.
Bluetooth
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
Enable the Bluetooth function (p.154).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.97).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.97).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.97).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
180
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.152). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.152).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.
Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.103).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
En
181
Problem
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
Cause
Remedy
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
En
182
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.167).
Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied
Cause
Remedy
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.103).
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.50).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.164).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
Unable to play
Update failed.
En
183
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
Audio information (audio decoding format)
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Atmos
DTS 96/24
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
DTS Dialog Control
sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
Dolby Atmos Stream
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
DTS Digital Surround
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
Dolby Digital
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
DTS-ES
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
Dolby Digital Plus
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
recorded.
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Express
Dolby Enabled Speaker
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
Dolby Surround
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
discs).
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
DTS-HD Master Audio
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
technology.
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
Dolby TrueHD
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
BD (Blu-ray discs).
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
En
184
DTS Neo:6
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
channels of surround sound.
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
En
185
Audio Information (Others)
HDMI and video information
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
Component video signal
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
is independent.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
Composite video signal
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
transmitted with a single cable.
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Deep Color
Lip sync
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
output.
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En
186
Network information
Yamaha technologies
SSID
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
Wi-Fi
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
CINEMA DSP HD3
WPS
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
wireless home network.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En
187
Supported devices and file formats
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
recording device or consult file’s help.
Supported devices
■ USB/PC (NAS)
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
File
■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
WAV *
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
16/24
-
2
,
MP3
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
WMA
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
-
2
,
ALAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96
16/24
-
2
,
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
-
2
,
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz
1
-
2
-
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
Sampling frequency
(kHz)
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
* Linear PCM format only
storage device.
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
■ AirPlay
files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of May 2017)
En
188
Video signal flow
Video conversion table
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
X
to a TV as shown below.
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
TV
HDMI out
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
m
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in
VIDEO in
VIDEO
VIDEO
480i/576i
VIDEO in
m: Available
En
189
m
m
Multi-zone output
Information on HDMI
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
Using the unit’s internal
amplifier (p.39)
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
In \ Out
Zone2
Zone3
HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.113)
Zone2
Zone3
m (*3)
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
Zone2 (*1)
Zone4 (*2)
m (*4)
m (*5)
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
Analog audio (AUDIO)
m
m
m
m
m
USB (*7)
m
m
m
m
m
Network sources (*7)
m
m
m
m
m
TUNER
m
m
m
m
m
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.41) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.44).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
m: Available
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Zone2 -
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Audio Output: On)
(Example)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
Playback device
also turns off
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
The unit turns off
(standby)
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Turn off the TV
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
selected in the main zone is selected)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.76)
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
with the web control (p.119) or use the party mode (p.117).
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote
control codes (p.169)
En
190
(Example)
HDMI Control
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
5
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
7
Press ON SCREEN.
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Y
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
3
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2
Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN
RETURN
3
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
5
6
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
DISPLAY
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
8
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
En
191
Y
HDMI signal compatibility
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the TV.
the instruction manual for each device.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
effectively.
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
2
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.43).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.77), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.
En
192
Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, and Apple TV are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited.
Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)
Windows™
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En
193
Specifications
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
Input jacks
[RX-A2070]
• Analog Audio
– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R)
– VGA
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
– 576i/50 Hz
[RX-A3070]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
[RX-A2070]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
• HDMI Output
– 480i/60 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2 *5)
– 576p/50 Hz
*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
Other jacks
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• YPAO MIC x 1
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• REMOTE IN x 1
• Supported Audio Formats
• REMOTE OUT x 1
– Dolby Atmos
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
– DTS:X
• RS-232C x 1
– Dolby TrueHD
HDMI
– Dolby Digital Plus
• HDMI Features
– Dolby Digital
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit)
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– 3D Video
– DTS-HD High Resolution
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
– ARC (Audio Return Channel)
– DTS Express
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
– HDMI Control (CEC)
– DTS
– Auto Lip Sync
– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX)
• Others
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE]
– Subwoofer Out x 2
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
– Deep Color
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
– x.v.Color
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
TUNER
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
• Analog Tuner
– HD audio playback
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
[Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
– HDMI Zone Output
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
– Headphone x 1
[Other models]
[RX-A3070]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
– Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4)
USB
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
En
194
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Source Function
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Wi-Fi function
Audio Section
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-A3070]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W
Center ......................................................................................165 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Compatible Decoding Formats
Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
• Decoding Format
Center ......................................................................................150 W
Source Function ............................................................................SBC
– Dolby Atmos
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
– Dolby Digital
Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW)
– DTS:X
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)
– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W
– DTS Digital Surround
Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W
• Supported Codec
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
• Post Decoding Format
Center ......................................................................................165 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W
– Dolby Surround
[RX-A2070]
– Neural:X
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
Center ......................................................................................150 W
Network
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
• PC Client Function
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
• AirPlay supported
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
• Internet Radio
Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W
Center ......................................................................................140 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W
En
195
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ......................................................................155 W+155 W
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ......................................................................................155 W
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W
Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W
Center.................................................................................230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W
Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3070]
Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-A3070]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................175/220/295/410 W
[RX-A2070]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................165/210/285/405 W
• Damping Factor
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 200 W/ch
Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch
Center.................................................................................230 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch
Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch
[RX-A3070]
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more
[RX-A2070]
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more
Front L/R ............................................................................ 185 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch
Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch
Center.................................................................................220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch
Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch
ZONE OUT.......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
[RX-A2070]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level
Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch
PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more
Center.................................................................................220 W/ch
• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB
Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch
• Total Harmonic Distortion
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch
[RX-A3070]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less
Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
.....................................................................................0.04% or less
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch
[RX-A2070]
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)
.....................................................................................0.04% or less
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch
En
196
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y...................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level.....................................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Standby Power Consumption
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
.................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
and Russia models)
• Tuning Range
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................................. 435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight
[RX-A3070]
[China, Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models]
............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
[Other models] ...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)
• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced
[RX-A2070] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]....................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Brazil and General models] .... AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model].............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W
En
197
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
List of remote control codes
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral
0320
0342
0323, 0343
0337
0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, 0339,
0346, 0347
Advent
0158
Adventura
0057
Adyson
0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi
0277, 0282
Agazi
0337
Aiko
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343
Aim
0320
Aiwa
0078, 0379
Akai
0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, 0181,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
Akiba
0320, 0340
Akura
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron
0277
Alba
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0351,
0372, 0382
Albatron
0140
Alcyon
0171
Alleron
0059
Allorgan
0282
Allstar
0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi
0276
Amplivision
0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Amtron
0058
Anam
0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo
0323, 0343
Anitech
0171, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
Ansonic
0161, 0168, 0320, 0323, 0341,
0343
AOC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex
0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam
0277, 0282
Arcam Delta
0342
Aristona
0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA
0339, 0347
Asberg
0171, 0320, 0350
Astra
0343
Asuka
Atlantic
Atori
Auchan
Audiosonic
0277, 0282, 0337, 0340, 0342
0277, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350
0323, 0343
0321
0161, 0282, 0320, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon
0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox
0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind
0171
Autovox
0171, 0282, 0337, 0339, 0342
Aventura
0051
Awa
0277, 0282
Axion
0156
Baird
0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0350
Bastide
0282, 0342
Baur
0320, 0349
Bazin
0282
Beko
0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, 0311,
0320, 0328, 0351
Belcor
0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq
0097, 0242, 0361
Beon
0320, 0349, 0350
Best
0161
Bestar
0161, 0320, 0350
BGH
0400
Binatone
0282, 0342
Blue Sky
0320, 0340
Blue Star
0348
Boots
0282, 0342
BPL
0320, 0348
Bradford
0058, 0179
Brandt
0322, 0345
Brillian
0182
Brinkmann
0320
Brionvega
0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Britannia
0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood
0008
Broksonic
0109, 0179
Bruns
0339
BTC
0340
Bush
0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0332, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0346, 0348, 0349, 0350,
0372, 0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
byd:sign
0093
Candle
0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
Capsonic
0337
En
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Centurion
Century
CGE
Changhong
Chimei
Cimline
Citizen
City
Clarion
Clarivox
Clatronic
0320
0050
0344
0010
0320, 0323, 0343
0367
0320, 0349, 0350
0183, 0282
0055, 0107
0039
0320, 0349, 0350
0339
0161, 0171
0039
0273
0323, 0343
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0058
0323, 0343
0179
0349
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350,
0351
CMS
0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby
0197
Colortyme
0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto
0008, 0026
Concorde
0323, 0343
Condor
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0350, 0351
Contec
0179, 0277, 0323, 0342, 0343,
0344
0012, 0058
Contec/Cony
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel
0323, 0343
Craig
0058, 0179
Crosley
0010, 0037, 0171, 0339
Crown
0058, 0161, 0171, 0179, 0320,
0323, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX
0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0049, 0050, 0178
CXC
0058, 0179
Cybertron
0340
Cytron
0152
198
Daewoo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0037, 0053,
0167, 0266, 0275, 0277, 0282,
0315, 0320, 0323, 0331, 0335,
0342, 0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi
0277, 0340
Dansai
0277, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349,
0350
Dantax
0161, 0349
Dawa
0320
Daytron
0007, 0008, 0026, 0323, 0343
De Graaf
0346
Decca
0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350
Dell
0145, 0245
Denver
0358, 0362
Desmet
0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant
0320
Diamond
0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia
0049
Disney
0219
Dixi
0282, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS
0323, 0343
Dual
0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec
0342, 0343
Dumont
0008, 0030, 0062, 0282, 0339,
0341, 0342
Durabrand
0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux
0349
Dwin
0178
Dynatron
0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex
0228, 0231
EIZO
0509
Elbe
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Elcit
0339
Electa
0348
ELECTRO TECH 0343
Electroband
0055, 0107
Electrograph
0176
Electrohome
0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
Element
0230
Elin
0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0349,
0350
Elite
0320, 0340, 0350
Elman
0341
Elta
0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson
0000, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0013,
0019, 0026, 0031, 0037, 0051,
0058, 0059, 0161, 0179, 0320,
0339
Emprex
Envision
Epson
Erres
ESA
ESC
Etron
Eurofeel
Euro-Feel
Euroline
Euroman
Euromann
Europhon
Expert
Exquisit
Fenner
Ferguson
Fidelity
Filsai
Finlandia
Finlux
FIRST LINE
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Formenti
Formenti/Phoenix
Fortress
Fraba
Friac
Frontech
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
Futuretech
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GBC
GE
Geant Casino
GEC
Geloso
General Technic
0154
0008, 0026, 0050
0155, 0206, 0359
0320, 0349, 0350
0051
0282
0343
0282
0337
0349
0161, 0277, 0282
0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
0277, 0282, 0320, 0341, 0342,
0350
0321
0320
0323, 0343
0322, 0345, 0349
0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
0282
0346
0171, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342, 0349, 0350
0342, 0343, 0350
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
0019, 0161, 0282, 0339, 0342,
0344, 0351
0320, 0350
0171, 0277, 0336, 0339, 0342,
0349
0277
0336, 0339
0161, 0320
0161
0282, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0346,
0347
0059, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0282
0282
0504, 0505, 0507, 0510, 0511
0051, 0058, 0059, 0112, 0113,
0115, 0118, 0119, 0179, 0337,
0488, 0489
0058, 0179
0320, 0351
0161, 0320
0176, 0177, 0241
0323, 0343, 0344
0008, 0021, 0023, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0034, 0049, 0052, 0056,
0209
0321
0282, 0320, 0342, 0347, 0349,
0350
0323, 0343, 0346
0323, 0343
Hygashi
Hyper
Hypson
Genexxa
GFM
Giant
Gibralter
GoldHand
Goldline
GoldStar
0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
0128, 0227
0282
0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
0277
0320
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0050, 0053, 0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0346,
0349, 0350
Goodmans
0246, 0272, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350,
0462, 0473, 0477
Gorenje
0161, 0351
GPM
0340
GPX
0129
Gradiente
0240
Graetz
0347
Granada
0171, 0282, 0320, 0321, 0342,
0344, 0346, 0349, 0350
Grandin
0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic
0282
Grundig
0160, 0161, 0171, 0310, 0320
Grunpy
0058, 0059, 0179
Haier
0157, 0233
Halifax
0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
Hallmark
0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton
0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350
Hantarex
0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor
0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard
0058, 0179
Harwood
0320, 0323
Havermy
0178
HCM
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343, 0348
Hema
0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi
0277
HiLine
0320
Hinari
0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hisawa
0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense
0247
Hitachi
0008, 0012, 0026, 0066, 0084,
0092, 0093, 0120, 0172, 0173,
0255, 0270, 0271, 0282, 0320,
0335, 0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448, 0456,
0467, 0482, 0484, 0487
Hornyphon
0320, 0350
Hoshai
0340
Huanyu
0277, 0342
En
Hyundai
Iberia
ICE
ICeS
Ilo
IMA
Imperial
Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Insignia
Inteq
Interactive
Interbuy
Interfunk
International
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITV
Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Jensen
JVC
Kaisui
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Karcher
Kawasho
KEC
199
0277, 0282, 0342
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
0282, 0320, 0321, 0337, 0342,
0348, 0349, 0350
0141
0320
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0350
0277
0148, 0153
0058
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350,
0351
0320, 0349, 0350
0010
0250, 0327, 0363, 0479, 0508
0347
0323, 0343
0153
0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
0337, 0343
0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
0030
0161
0323, 0343
0161, 0320, 0339, 0347, 0349,
0350
0277
0161, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0341,
0342
0171, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0349, 0350
0320, 0340
0282, 0342
0277, 0320, 0340, 0348, 0350
0343, 0347
0320, 0343, 0349
0057
0010
0007, 0008, 0026, 0027, 0049,
0053, 0056
0055, 0107
0008, 0026
0012, 0014, 0015, 0056, 0064,
0065, 0067, 0169, 0174, 0297,
0314, 0344, 0350, 0375
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0348
0342
0277, 0342
0347
0161, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0349
0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
0179
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kingsley
KLH
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
KTV
Kyoto
Lasat
Lenco
Lenoir
Leyco
LG
LG/GoldStar
Liesenk
Liesenkotter
Life
Lifetec
Lloyds
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnavox
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor
0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
0008, 0026, 0050
0282
0277, 0342
0039
0057, 0058
0161, 0168, 0320
0320, 0350
0340
0320, 0349, 0350
0161, 0339
0320
0343
0007, 0050, 0058, 0179, 0183,
0282, 0342
0277, 0282
0161
0323, 0343
0323, 0342, 0343
0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
0031, 0053, 0066, 0116, 0117,
0140, 0161, 0164, 0175, 0195,
0269, 0277, 0282, 0300, 0309,
0317, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0366,
0368, 0377, 0466, 0471, 0478
0164
0349
0320
0337, 0343
0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
0323
0161, 0168, 0265, 0320, 0330,
0352
0339, 0349, 0350
0054
0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
0282, 0320, 0346, 0349, 0350
0350
0008, 0026
0282, 0342, 0346
0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0049, 0111
0342, 0343, 0345, 0347, 0349,
0350
0096
0339, 0341, 0349
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0008, 0009, 0010, 0013, 0026,
0032, 0033, 0048, 0050, 0128,
0211, 0212, 0224, 0226, 0239
0337, 0343
0054
0337
Manesth
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349,
0350
Marantz
0008, 0010, 0026, 0050, 0204,
0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli
0339
Mark
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0349,
0350
Masuda
0282
Matsui
0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343,
0344, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0455
Matsushita
0017
Maxent
0147, 0176
Mediator
0320, 0349, 0350
Medion
0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower
0140
Megatron
0026, 0031
MElectronic
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox
0321
Memorex
0019, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0054,
0137, 0215, 0323, 0343
Memphis
0323, 0343
Mercury
0320, 0323
Metz
0339
MGA
0008, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053
Micromaxx
0337, 0343
Microstar
0337, 0343
Midland
0007, 0021, 0023, 0027, 0030,
0056, 0062
Minerva
0171
Minoka
0320, 0350
Mintek
0153
Mitsubishi
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0066,
0084, 0093, 0098, 0150, 0178,
0289, 0320, 0339, 0344, 0350,
0376
Mivar
0161, 0168, 0171, 0277, 0282,
0342
Monivision
0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion
0171
Motorola
0052, 0178
MTC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277
Multi System
0349
Multitech
0058, 0161, 0179, 0183, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349
Murphy
0277, 0342
NAD
0026, 0031, 0111
Naonis
0346
NEC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0072, 0103, 0282, 0344
Neckermann
0161, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0342,
0346, 0349, 0350, 0351
NEI
Net-TV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
NewTech
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Nikko
Nobliko
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
Nordvision
Novatronic
Oceanic
Okano
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
Opera
Oppo
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
Orion
Orline
Osaki
Oso
Otto Versand
Pael
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panasonic
Panavision
Pathe Cinema
Pausa
Penney
Perdio
Perfekt
Philco
Philharmonic
0320, 0349, 0350
0176
0320, 0323
0343, 0350
0340
0282, 0320, 0323
0277, 0342
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0349, 0350
0026, 0031, 0050
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0347
0201
0282
0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
0349
0320
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0351
0102, 0199, 0200, 0207, 0222
0342
0058, 0179
0320
0130
0017, 0019
0144
0178
0320, 0350
0043, 0146, 0283, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0343, 0349, 0350
0320
0282, 0320, 0337, 0340, 0342
0340
0282, 0320, 0336, 0342, 0344,
0348, 0349, 0350
0277, 0342
0161, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0351
0282
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343
0016, 0017, 0020, 0022, 0023,
0035, 0052, 0056, 0084, 0085,
0133, 0163, 0193, 0284, 0286,
0290, 0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483, 0485, 0490
0320
0161, 0168, 0277, 0321, 0342
0323, 0343
0021, 0023, 0031, 0050, 0111
0277, 0320
0320
0008, 0009, 0010, 0012, 0026,
0050, 0052, 0053, 0161, 0171,
0320, 0339
0282, 0342
En
Philips
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0012,
0032, 0048, 0049, 0052, 0122,
0128, 0134, 0186, 0187, 0213,
0221, 0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263, 0267,
0280, 0281, 0287, 0296, 0299,
0301, 0303, 0305, 0313, 0319,
0320, 0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357, 0360,
0380, 0383, 0452, 0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix
0161, 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Phonola
0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Pilot
0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer
0008, 0026, 0094, 0095, 0161,
0320, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350,
0458, 0480
Plantron
0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic
0282
Polaroid
0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy
0323, 0343
Portland
0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346
Precision
0282, 0342
Prima
0157, 0243, 0323, 0343, 0347
Princeton
0140
Prism
0023, 0056
Profex
0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic
0320, 0350
Proline
0320, 0350
Proscan
0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0349
Protech
0282, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
Proton
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron
0196
PROVIEW
0096, 0246
Provision
0320, 0349
Pulsar
0008, 0030, 0062
Pye
0256, 0320, 0349, 0350, 0378
Pymi
0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar
0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349,
0350
Questa
0344
Radialva
0320
RadioShack
0019, 0021, 0031, 0050, 0179,
0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0049,
0058
Radiola
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
200
Radiomarelli
Radiotone
Rank
RCA
0320, 0339
0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
0344
0008, 0021, 0024, 0025, 0026,
0027, 0042, 0049, 0052, 0053,
0063, 0136, 0225
Realistic
0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor
0320
Redstar
0320
Reflex
0320
Revox
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex
0337, 0346, 0347
RFT
0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody
0277
R-Line
0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar
0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron
0339
Rowa
0277, 0282, 0400, 0403, 0494
Royal Lux
0161
RTF
0339
Runco
0030, 0050, 0062
Saba
0298, 0322, 0339, 0345, 0347
Saisho
0282, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343
Salora
0346, 0347
Sambers
0171, 0341
Sampo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0176,
0400
Samsung
0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0026, 0031, 0036, 0050,
0053, 0076, 0077, 0079, 0114,
0124, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190, 0191,
0258, 0264, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0334, 0337, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra
0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui
0043, 0109, 0320, 0350, 0400
Sanyo
0008, 0019, 0068, 0070, 0071,
0099, 0161, 0168, 0223, 0237,
0277, 0282, 0288, 0295, 0323,
0342, 0344, 0369, 0469
SBR
0320, 0349
Sceptre
0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider
0282, 0316, 0318, 0320, 0333,
0340, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0382
Scotch
0026, 0031
Scott
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0149, 0179
Sears
0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0051, 0059,
0111
SEG
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0341, 0342, 0344, 0349, 0382
SEI
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp
0320
0339, 0341, 0347
0344, 0346, 0347
0323, 0343
0323
0277
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0060, 0088,
0089, 0091, 0138, 0165, 0170,
0178, 0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312, 0336,
0344, 0354, 0370, 0449, 0450,
0451, 0464, 0474, 0476, 0481
Sheng Chia
0178
Shogun
0008
Siarem
0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra
0320, 0350
Siesta
0161
Signature
0054
Silva
0277
Silver
0344
Singer
0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne
0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
Skantic
0347
Skyworth
0402, 0492, 0493, 0495
Solavox
0347
Sonitron
0161, 0282
Sonoko
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Sonolor
0321, 0347
Sontec
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Sony
0038, 0044, 0045, 0047, 0055,
0090, 0104, 0105, 0107, 0110,
0123, 0184, 0220, 0248, 0249,
0251, 0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457, 0475,
0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign
0008, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059,
0179
Soundwave
0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview
0051
SSS
0008, 0058, 0179
Standard
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350
Starlite
0058, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0349
Stenway
0348
Stern
0346, 0347
Strato
0320, 0323
Stylandia
0282
Sunkai
0343
Sunstar
0320, 0323
Sunwood
0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla
0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan
0013, 0178
SuperTech
Supra
Supre-Macy
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
SVA
Sydney
Sylvania
0277, 0320, 0323
0323, 0343
0057
0055, 0107
0340
0323, 0343
0151
0277, 0282, 0342
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0013,
0026, 0048, 0050, 0051, 0128,
0227, 0253
Symphonic
0051, 0058, 0062, 0128, 0179,
0215
Syntax
0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline
0349
Sytong
0277
Tandy
0178, 0282, 0336, 0340, 0342,
0347
Tashiko
0277, 0282, 0342, 0344, 0346
Tatung
0052, 0177, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
TCM
0337, 0343
TCL
0400, 0401, 0403, 0406, 0494
Teac
0282, 0320, 0400
Tec
0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
Technics
0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat
0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
Techwood
0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
TEDELEX
0282
Teknika
0007, 0008, 0010, 0012, 0026,
0053, 0054, 0058, 0059, 0179
Teleavia
0345
Telecor
0282, 0320
Telefunken
0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi
0320
Telemeister
0320
Telesonic
0320
Telestar
0320
Teletech
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton
0282, 0342
Televideon
0277
Televiso
0321
Tensai
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0350
Tesmet
0350
Tevion
0337, 0343
Texet
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson
0162, 0188, 0189, 0285, 0320,
0322, 0342, 0345, 0350
Thorn
0320, 0349
TMK
0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi
0030
Tokai
0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo
0277, 0342
En
Tomashi
Toshiba
0348
0018, 0019, 0040, 0041, 0046,
0073, 0100, 0103, 0108, 0109,
0111, 0121, 0132, 0166, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304, 0306,
0307, 0329, 0344, 0355, 0454,
0491
Totevision
0007
Towada
0282, 0347
Trakton
0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec
0277
Trident
0282
Triumph
0320
Uher
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350
Ultravox
0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342
Unic Line
0320
United
0349
Universum
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350, 0351
Univox
0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel
0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0349,
0350, 0351
Vexa
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor
0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique
0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
0320, 0350
VideoSystem
Videotechnic
0277, 0282
Vidikron
0010
Vidtech
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic
0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking
0057
Viore
0148
Visiola
0277, 0342
Vision
0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio
0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, 0500,
0501, 0502, 0503, 0506
Vortec
0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson
0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, 0347,
0350
Waltham
0282, 0320, 0342
Wards
0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, 0031,
0048, 0049, 0050, 0053, 0054,
0059
Watson
0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio
0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon
0111
Wega
0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox
0323
Weltblick
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
201
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0349
Wincom
0101, 0106
Xrypton
0320
Yamaha
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0080,
0081, 0082, 0083, 0086, 0087
Yamishi
0282, 0320
Yokan
0320
Yoko
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Yorx
0340
Zanussi
0282, 0346
Zenith
0008, 0028, 0029, 0030, 0031,
0054, 0061, 0062
VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
Akai
Akiba
Akura
Alba
1016
1069
1008
1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
1021, 1027
1008, 1029
1008, 1027, 1029
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1030
Alienware
1016
Ambassador
1030
American High 1068
Amstrad
1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech
1008, 1029
Apex
1088
ASA
1028, 1031
Asha
1070
Asuka
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic
1009
Audiovox
1071
Baird
1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1030
Baur
1028
Beaumark
1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar
1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt
1028
Bondstec
1008, 1030
Broksonic
1100
Bush
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1049, 1051, 1063, 1217
Calix
1071
Candle
1070, 1071
Canon
1068
Cathay
1009
Catron
1030
CGE
1026, 1027
Cimline
1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision
1104
Citizen
1070, 1071
Clatronic
1008, 1030
Colortyme
1064
Condor
1009, 1025, 1030
Craig
1070, 1071
Crown
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex
1070
CyberPower
1016
Daewoo
1009, 1025, 1030, 1038, 1069,
1223
Dansai
1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax
1024
Daytron
1009, 1025
DBX
1064
De Graaf
1028
Decca
1026, 1027, 1028
Dell
1016
Denko
1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion
1014
DIRECTV
1019, 1105, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro
1018
Dual
1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont
1026, 1028
Durabrand
1114
Dynatech
1069
Echostar
1018
Elbe
1009
Elcatech
1008
Electrohome
1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay
1008
Elta
1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson
1008, 1020, 1068, 1069, 1071
ESC
1009, 1025
Etzuko
1008, 1029
Expressvu
1018
Ferguson
1027
Fidelity
1008, 1026
Finlandia
1028
Finlux
1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline
1008, 1024, 1029, 1031
Instant Replay
Interbuy
Interfunk
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
ITV
JC Penney
JCL
JVC
1068
1008, 1031
1028
1009, 1026
1008, 1029, 1031
1027
1009, 1025, 1031
1064, 1065, 1068, 1070, 1071
1068
1007, 1018, 1027, 1039, 1064,
1065, 1066, 1067, 1078, 1089,
1092, 1093, 1094, 1095, 1113,
1208, 1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
Kaisui
1008, 1029
Karcher
1028
Kendo
1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
Kenwood
1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak
1068, 1071
Korpel
1008, 1029
Kyoto
1008
Lenco
1025
Leyco
1008, 1029
LG
1010, 1026, 1031, 1047, 1054,
1056, 1071, 1103, 1221
Lifetec
1024
Linksys
1016
Lloyd's
1069
Loewe Opta
1028, 1031
Logik
1008, 1029
Lumatron
1009, 1025
Luxor
1008
LXI
1071
M Electronic
1026
Magnavox
1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
Magnin
1071
Manesth
1008, 1029
Marantz
1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
Mark
1009
Marta
1071
Matsui
1024, 1031
Matsushita
1068
Media Center PC 1016
Mediator
1028
Medion
1024
MEI
1068
Memorex
1023, 1026, 1031, 1065, 1068,
1069, 1070, 1071, 1098, 1114
Memphis
1008, 1029
MGN Technology 1070
Micromaxx
1024
Microsoft
1016
Microstar
1024
Migros
1026
Mind
1016
Fisher
Flint
Formenti/Phoenix
Frontech
Fuji
Fujitsu
Funai
Galaxy
Garrard
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
General
General Technic
GOI
GoldHand
Goldstar
Goodmans
1065
1024
1028
1030
1068
1026
1026, 1069
1026
1069
1016
1029, 1030
1068, 1070
1028
1029
1030
1024
1018
1008, 1029
1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029,
1030, 1031
Gradiente
1069
Graetz
1027
Granada
1028
Grandin
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029,
1030, 1031
Grundig
1028, 1029
Hanseatic
1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood
1008
HCM
1008, 1029
Headquarter
1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa
1024
Hitachi
1011, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1046,
1062
HNS
1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP
1016
HTS
1018
Hughes
1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax
1012, 1110, 1113
Hush
1016
Hypson
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego
1030
Imperial
1026
Inno Hit
1008, 1009, 1025, 1028, 1029,
1030
Innovation
1024
En
202
Mitsubishi
Motorola
MTC
Multitech
1026, 1028, 1079
1068
1070
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1069, 1070
Murphy
1026
NEC
1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann
1027, 1028
NEI
1028
Nesco
1008, 1029
Nikkai
1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko
1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex
1070
Nokia
1009, 1027
Nordmende
1027
Northgate
1016
Oceanic
1026, 1027
Okano
1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus
1068
Optimus
1071
Orion
1023, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1217
Orson
1026
Osaki
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand
1028
Palladium
1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
Panasonic
1000, 1022, 1044, 1055, 1068,
1072, 1085, 1090, 1091, 1120,
1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio
1026
Philco
1008, 1068
Philips
1006, 1013, 1028, 1035, 1040,
1045, 1046, 1050, 1058, 1059,
1061, 1068, 1076, 1101, 1110,
1113, 1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox 1076
Phonola
1028
Pilot
1071
Pioneer
1028, 1036
Polaroid
1088, 1099
Portland
1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz
1026
Profex
1029
Proline
1026
Proscan
1019
Prosonic
1009, 1024
Pulsar
1114
Pye
1028, 1102
Quarter
1065
Quartz
1065
Quasar
1068
Quelle
1026, 1028
Radialva
1008
RadioShack
1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
Radiola
1028
Radix
1071
Randex
1071
RCA
1019, 1068, 1070, 1075, 1110,
1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
ReplayTV
1022, 1123
Rex
1027
RFT
1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision
1016
Roadstar
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1031
Royal
1008
Runco
1114
Saba
1027
Saisho
1024, 1029
Samsung
1002, 1034, 1041, 1043, 1057,
1060, 1070, 1084, 1110, 1116,
1122, 1124, 1220, 1222
Samurai
1008, 1030
Sanky
1114
Sansui
1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
Sanyo
1032, 1065, 1070
Saville
1009
SBR
1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1026,
1028, 1029, 1030, 1031
Sears
1065, 1068, 1071
SEG
1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco
1027
Sentra
1008, 1030
Sentron
1008, 1029
Sharp
1003, 1033, 1077, 1107, 1127,
1219
Shintom
1008, 1029
Shivaki
1031
Shogun
1070
Siemens
1031
Silva
1031
Silver
1009
Singer
1068
Sinudyne
1028
Solavox
1030
Sonic Blue
1022, 1123
Sonneclair
1008
Sonoko
1009, 1025
Sontec
1031
Sony
1001, 1016, 1048, 1053, 1073,
1074, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1108, 1118, 1216
Stack
1016
Voodoo
Wards
Weltblick
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Zenith
ZT Group
Stack 9
Standard
Stern
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Sunwood
Superscan
Sylvania
Symphonic
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Taisho
Tandberg
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Teknika
Teleavia
Telefunken
Teletech
Tenosal
Tensai
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
Tivo
1016
1009, 1025
1009
1068
1024
1026
1026
1008, 1029
1020
1020, 1068, 1069, 1102, 1126
1008, 1069, 1126
1016
1016
1024
1009
1065
1026, 1071
1026, 1027, 1028
1015, 1024, 1042
1009, 1069
1008, 1009, 1030
1068
1068, 1069, 1071
1027
1027
1008, 1009
1008, 1029
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
1024
1005, 1027
1027
1108, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1117,
1118, 1119, 1122
TMK
1070
Tokai
1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai
1029
Toshiba
1004, 1016, 1027, 1028, 1037,
1049, 1052, 1086, 1087, 1097,
1109, 1112, 1194
Totevision
1070, 1071
Touch
1016
Towada
1008, 1029
Towika
1008, 1029
TVA
1030
Uher
1031
UltimateTV
1019
Ultravox
1009
Unitech
1070
United Quick Star 1009, 1025
Universum
1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon
1024
Videosonic
1070
Viewsonic
1016
En
1016
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
1031
1068, 1069
1064, 1065
1008, 1029
1008, 1029
1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
1114
1016
DVD
4Kus
2051
Accurian
2142
Advent
2155, 2251
AEG
2362
Airis
2364
Aiwa
2322
Akai
2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
Akura
2356
Alba
2064, 2165, 2186, 2337, 2346
Alco
2149
Alize
2361
Allegro
2133
Amitech
2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW
2195, 2363
Apex
2030, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127,
2130, 2131
Apple
2241
Arrgo
2138
Asono
2364
Aspire
2152, 2222
Astar
2240
ATACOM
2364
Audiovox
2061, 2149
Avious
2367
Awa
2363
Axion
2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze
2367
BBK
2364
Bellagio
2363
Best Buy
2359
Blaupunkt
2131
Blue Parade
2157
Boghe
2382
Brainwave
2362
Brandt
2148, 2188
Broksonic
2145, 2146
Bush
2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, 2290,
2346, 2358, 2367, 2383
203
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio 2354
CAT
2352, 2353
CAVS
2192
Centrum
2353
CGV
2354, 2362
Changhong
2140
Cinetec
2363
CineVision
2133, 2237
Clatronic
2358, 2367
Coby
2031, 2046, 2360
Conia
2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown
2362
C-Tech
2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG
2377
CyberHome
2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, 2336
Cytron
2244
Daenyx
2363
Daewoo
2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, 2330,
2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton
2357
Dansai
2362, 2381
Daytek
2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton
2363
DEC
2358
Decca
2362
Denon
2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver
2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel
2380
Desay
2205
Diamond
2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney
2010, 2028
DK Digital
2339
Dmtech
2176
Dual
2380
DUNE
2509
Durabrand
2136
DVX
2355
Easy Home
2359
Eclipse
2354
E-Dem
2364
Electrohome
2362
Elin
2362
Elta
2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson
2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise
2129
Enzer
2380
Epson
2247
ESA
2137
Finlux
2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec
2377
Fisher
2134
Funai
2137
Gateway
2051
GE
2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom
2351
GFM
2226
Giec
2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video
2133, 2213
Goodmans
2165, 2280, 2291, 2358, 2371,
2376, 2382
GPX
2227
Gradiente
2151
Graetz
2380
Greenhill
2131
Grundig
2349
Grunkel
2362, 2366
GVG
2377
H&B
2358
H_her
2364
Haaz
2354, 2355
Haier
2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX
2359
Hitachi
2062, 2090, 2115, 2274, 2316,
2359, 2380
Hiteker
2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai
2366
Ilo
2245
Initial
2131, 2245
Innovation
2182
Insignia
2002, 2137, 2253
Integra
2157
Irradio
2053
iSymphony
2246
JBL
2135
JVC
2020, 2096, 2097, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107,
2160, 2257, 2260, 2262, 2263,
2321, 2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469, 2471
Jwin
2198
Kansai
2360
Kawasaki
2149
Kennex
2362
Kenwood
2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug
2362
Kiiro
2362
Kingavon
2358
Kiss
KLH
Koda
Koss
KXD
Landel
Lasonic
Lawson
Lecson
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion
Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
2380
2131, 2149
2358
2013, 2148, 2158
2359
2143
2132
2355
2381
2358, 2362, 2367
2136, 2153
2002, 2033, 2038, 2057, 2129,
2133, 2189, 2191, 2223, 2238,
2270, 2288, 2335, 2373, 2375
2182
2182
2355
2158
2043, 2051, 2142
2320
2355
2025, 2050, 2137, 2150, 2159,
2224, 2230, 2358
2367
2360
2328
2362
2148, 2378
2199
2362
2182
2028, 2145, 2234
2354, 2382
2182
2156
2182
2362
2367
2131, 2245
2003
2358, 2359
2380
2186
2354
2366
2362
2131
2380
2362
2143
2243
2383
2159, 2368
2051
2196, 2255
En
Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic
Parasound
peeKTON
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Pointer
Polaroid
Portland
Powerpoint
Prima
Proceed
Proscan
Prosonic
Protron
Provision
Pye
Qwestar
Raite
RCA
RedStar
Regent
Reoc
Rimax
Rio
Roadstar
Ronin
Rotel
204
2381
2180
2358
2363
2073, 2110
2148, 2158
2358
2355
2011, 2024, 2034, 2042, 2058,
2062, 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2118, 2119, 2120, 2121,
2122, 2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173, 2175,
2209, 2214, 2275, 2277, 2278,
2281, 2282, 2283, 2301, 2374,
2470
2197
2364
2008, 2012, 2025, 2044, 2050,
2051, 2053, 2060, 2072, 2108,
2111, 2147, 2159, 2163, 2169,
2174, 2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287, 2289,
2295, 2300, 2302, 2317, 2328,
2338, 2342, 2350, 2467
2367
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2035,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109, 2157,
2180, 2190, 2212, 2269, 2272,
2299, 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311, 2344,
2345, 2347, 2379
2362
2125, 2215, 2235
2362
2363
2252
2130
2156
2360, 2377
2202
2358
2144
2148
2380
2021, 2029, 2104, 2105, 2131,
2149, 2156, 2157, 2229
2356, 2360, 2362
2153
2355
2361
2133
2331, 2358
2363
2203
Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
Sampo
Samsung
2154, 2383
2353
2148, 2188
2355
2362
2141
2000, 2045, 2077, 2112, 2113,
2114, 2115, 2151, 2200, 2216,
2219, 2228, 2264, 2265, 2271,
2279, 2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui
2073, 2145, 2354, 2355, 2362
Sanyo
2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic
2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider
2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott
2161, 2357
Seeltech
2364
SEG
2161, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp
2006, 2040, 2088, 2091, 2182,
2194, 2220, 2221, 2231, 2236,
2293, 2340
Shinsonic
2245
Sigmatek
2359, 2364
Silva
2356
Singer
2354, 2355
Skymaster
2325, 2355
Skyworth
2356
Slim Art
2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue
2133
Sontech
2366
Sony
2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014,
2015, 2023, 2026, 2027, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2070, 2071, 2074,
2075, 2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211, 2258,
2273, 2284, 2285, 2312, 2313,
2314, 2315, 2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster
2355
Soundmax
2355
Spectra
2363
Spectroniq
2201
Standard
2355
Star Cluster
2355
Starmedia
2358, 2364
Sungale
2204
Sunkai
2362
Superscan
2150
Supervision
2355
Sylvania
2012, 2137, 2150, 2178, 2230,
2239
Symphonic
2108, 2230
Synn
2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Technika
Telefunken
Tensai
Tevion
Theta Digital
Thomson
Tokai
Top Suxess
Toshiba
2001, 2362
2182, 2297
2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
2356
2151
2362, 2367
2353
2362
2182, 2355, 2357
2157
2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
2356, 2380
2364
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2048,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2072, 2073,
2076, 2078, 2079, 2086, 2145,
2159, 2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369, 2508
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367
Transonic
2367
Trio
2362
Trutech
2242
TruVision
2359
TSM
2364
Umax
2361
United
2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic
2245
Venturer
2149
Viewmaster
2364
Vocopro
2206
VocoStar
2207
Waitec
2364
Welltech
2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale
2354, 2355
Woxter
2361, 2364
Xbox
2156, 2183
Xlogic
2355, 2362
XMS
2362
Xoro
2382
Yamada
2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha
2056, 2064, 2065, 2080, 2081,
2082, 2083, 2089, 2118, 2151,
2323
Yamakawa
2363, 2380
Yukai
2186
Zenith
2002, 2129, 2133, 2159, 2223
Blu-ray Disc
Denon
Hitachi
2452, 2500, 2501
2460, 2461, 2463
JVC
LG
Marantz (US)
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha
Sanyo
Sony
2472, 2473, 2475, 2478, 2496,
2499, 2511
2033, 2456, 2457
2454, 2455
2450, 2451
2504
2011, 2209, 2214, 2476, 2477,
2479
2510
2212, 2506
2045, 2113, 2498
2194, 2220, 2221, 2497, 2502,
2503
2075, 2453, 2458, 2459, 2507
2462
2064, 2448, 2449, 2474, 2505
Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha
Cable
ABC
3002, 3003, 3017, 3066, 3067,
3086, 3093, 3119, 3122
ADB
3020
Adelphia
3081
Alcatel
3016
Americast
3124
Amstrad
3022, 3098
Antronix
3065, 3070
Archer
3070
Arcon
3098
AT&T
3095
Axis
3098
Bell South
3124
Cable Vision
3092
Cabletenna
3065
Cabletime
3104
Cableview
3087
Clearmaster
3127
ClearMax
3127
Clyde Cablevision 3105
Colour Voice
3068
Comcast
3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt
3107
Comtronics
3069
Contec
3074
Coolmax
3127
COX
3084
Cryptovision
3110
Director
3084
Eastern
3075
Everquest
3123
Fidelity
3098
Filmnet
3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux
3097
FIOS
3005
Focus
3126
Foxtel
3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox
3023
GC Electronics 3070
DVR
Bush
Hitachi
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Victor
Yamaha
2110
2090
2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117,
2119, 2120, 2122, 2123
2108, 2111
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2092,
2094, 2095, 2109
2105
2113, 2219
2088, 2091
2084, 2085, 2087
2086
2475
2089, 2118
DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui
2222
2240
2146
2213
2062
2002
2053
2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
2043
2011, 2034, 2058, 2062, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2123
2008, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2147
2017, 2035
2144
2000, 2112, 2216
2073
En
2217
2004, 2005, 2007, 2052, 2068,
2069, 2074, 2208, 2210, 2211
2239
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2049,
2054, 2055, 2076
2056
205
GE
3066, 3093
GEC
3105
Gemini
3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084, 3090,
3096, 3117
Goldstar
3120
Gooding
3099
Grundig
3098, 3099
Hamlin
3073, 3078
Hirschmann
3097
Hitachi
3066
HomeChoice
3106
Humax
3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia
3097
Jasco
3123
Jerrold
3017, 3018, 3025, 3066, 3072,
3084, 3090, 3096, 3119, 3123
JVC
3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab
3101
Magnavox
3079
Maspro
3099
Matsui
3099
MegaCable
3117
Memorex
3076, 3122
Minerva
3099
Mnet
3107
Motorola
3025, 3026, 3084, 3088, 3090,
3095, 3117
Movie Time
3077, 3109
Mr Zapp
3101
Multichoice
3107
Multitech
3127
NEC
3064
NET Brazil
3085
Nokia
3097
Noos
3101
NSC
3077
Oak
3074
Pace
3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium
3099
Panasonic
3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon
3122
Philips
3068, 3071, 3079, 3099, 3100,
3101, 3103
Pioneer
3001, 3006, 3094, 3098, 3114,
3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan
3066, 3093
Pulsar
3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar
RadioShack
RCA
Realistic
Recoton
Regal
Regency
Rembrandt
Runco
Sagem
Samsung
SAT
Scientific Atlanta
3122
3123, 3127
3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
3070
3126
3078
3075
3066
3122
3101
3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
3098
3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3006,
3028, 3029, 3081, 3086, 3089,
3094, 3095, 3108
Signal
3072, 3123
Signature
3066
Sony
3092, 3125
Sprucer
3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom
3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate
3072, 3123
Starquest
3072, 3123
Supercable
3090
Supermax
3127
Tele+1
3107, 3111
TELENET
3004
Telepiu
3107
Thomson
3082, 3091
TIME WARNER 3084
Tocom
3067
Torx
3017
Toshiba
3122
Tristar
3127
Tudi
3102
Tusa
3072, 3123
TV86
3077
Unika
3065, 3070
United Cable
3018, 3119
Universal
3065, 3070
Universum
3097, 3099
V2
3127
Verizon Fios
3007
Videoway
3019
View Star
3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster
3127
Vision
3127
Visiopass
3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View
3127
Wittenberg
3098
Zenith
3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek
3126
CHEROKEE
Chess
CityCom
Clatronic
CNT
Comag
Commlink
Comtech
Condor
Connexions
Conrad
Conrad Electronic
Contec
Coolsat
Cosat
Coship
Crown
Daeryung
Daewoo
DDC
Delega
Dew
Diamond
Digiality
Digital Stream
DIRECTV
Satellite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba
4216, 4217
4104
4220
4216
4053, 4055
4001, 4004, 4006, 4007, 4062,
4217
Aldes
4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat
4048, 4053, 4055
Allsonic
4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech
4217
Alpha
4053
Alpha Digital
4104
Alphastar
4077
Amitronica
4217
Amstrad
4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
Anglo
4217
Ankaro
4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
Anttron
4001, 4004
Apollo
4001
Armstrong
4011, 4053
Artec
4100
Asat
4053, 4055
ASLF
4217
Astacom
4216
Astra
4009, 4011, 4054, 4217, 4219
Astro
4004, 4008, 4010, 4015, 4024,
4213, 4218, 4219
AudioTon
4004, 4048
Aurora
4222, 4246
Austar
4222, 4246
Axiel
4216
Axis
4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
BBK
4205
Best
4008, 4024
Blaupunkt
4015
Blue Sky
4217
Boca
4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
Boston
4216
Brain Wave
4013
Broadcast
4012
Broco
4217
BSkyB
4035, 4041
BT
4216
Bubu Sat
4217
Bush
4006, 4045
Cambridge
4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+
4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral
4075
En
Discoverer
Discovery
Diseqc
Dish Network
Dishpro
Distrisat
Ditristrad
DNT
Drake
DStv
Dune
Echostar
Einhell
Elap
Elekta
Elsat
Elta
Emanon
Emme Esse
Engel
Ep Sat
206
4216
4212, 4217
4006, 4215, 4219
4013
4010
4080, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4086
4005
4050
4008, 4024, 4219
4014, 4024
4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
4217, 4219
4050
4096
4048
4109
4011
4014
4057, 4217
4007
4007
4050
4051
4219
4105
4056, 4064, 4067, 4068, 4070,
4071, 4074, 4107, 4116, 4119,
4121, 4122, 4123, 4127, 4192,
4193, 4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201, 4202,
4203, 4206, 4207, 4221
4212
4216
4216
4018, 4065, 4089, 4092, 4094,
4095, 4117
4018, 4117
4053
4048
4014, 4053, 4055
4072
4222, 4246
4024, 4240, 4242
4014, 4018, 4065, 4089, 4117,
4217
4001, 4005, 4011, 4217, 4218
4216, 4217
4010
4217
4001, 4008, 4024, 4048, 4053,
4055
4001
4008, 4024
4217
4006
EURIEULT
Eurodec
Europa
Europhon
Eurosat
Eurosky
4031
4052
4053, 4218, 4219
4219
4011
4008, 4011, 4215, 4218, 4219,
4024
Eurostar
4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat
4217
Exator
4001, 4004
Expressvu
4117
Fenner
4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson
4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity
4218
Finlandia
4006
Finlux
4006
FinnSat
4050, 4052
Flair Mate
4217
Foxtel
4204, 4222, 4244, 4245, 4246,
4247
Freecom
4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal
4024, 4217
Fuba
4001, 4008, 4014, 4015, 4024,
4055, 4215
Galaxis
4005, 4008, 4009, 4024, 4048,
4050, 4215, 4222, 4246
GE
4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI
4011
GOI
4117
Goldbox
4213
GoldStar
4049
Goodmans
4002, 4006, 4029
Goodmind
4111
Grandin
4031
Grothusen
4001, 4049
Grundig
4004, 4006, 4015, 4035, 4211,
4218, 4222, 4246
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor
4001, 4013
Hanuri
4010
Hauppauge
4044
Heliocom
4219
Helium
4219
Hinari
4007
Hirschmann
4015, 4024, 4210, 4216, 4218,
4219
Hisawa
4013
Hisense
4016
Hitachi
4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast
4084, 4085, 4087
Houston
4048
HTS
4117
Hughes
4064, 4068, 4192, 4194, 4196,
4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax
4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth
4005, 4011, 4012, 4013, 4048,
4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson
4031
Ilo
4016
Imex
4031
Innovation
4008
Insignia
4107
Intertronic
4011
Intervision
4048, 4219
ITT Nokia
4006
Jerrold
4019
Johansson
4013
JOK
4216
JSR
4048
JVC
4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm
4217
Kathrein
4015, 4034, 4042, 4053, 4055,
4063, 4215, 4216, 4217
Kathrein Eurostar 4215
Klap
4216
Konig
4219
Kosmos
4049
KR
4004
Kreiselmeyer
4015
K-SAT
4217
Kyostar
4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat
4008, 4010, 4024, 4054, 4212,
4215, 4219
Lasonic
4108
Lenco
4001, 4024, 4049, 4215, 4217,
4219
Leng
4013
Lennox
4048
Lenson
4218
Lexus
4053
LG
4049, 4103, 4107
Lifesat
4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
Lifetec
4008
Lorenzen
4219
Lorraine
4049
Lupus
4008, 4024
Luxor
4218
Lyonnaise
4052
Macab
4052
Magnavox
4127, 4101
Manata
4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan
4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
Marantz
4055
Mascom
4010
Maspro
Matsui
Max
Mediabox
Mediamarkt
Mediasat
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic
4006, 4217
4216
4219
4213
4011
4009, 4213, 4218
4008, 4024, 4217
4217
4053, 4055
4127
4001, 4004, 4005, 4010, 4028,
4031, 4217
Metz
4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology 4217
MicroGem
4106
Micromaxx
4008, 4024
Microstar
4008
Microtec
4217
Minerva
4015
Mitsubishi
4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi
4054
Morgan's
4011, 4053, 4054, 4055, 4217
Motorola
4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
Multichoice
4222, 4246
Multitec
4212
Muratto
4049
Mysat
4217
Navex
4013
Neuhaus
4009, 4048, 4217, 4218, 4219
Neusat
4217
Next Level
4019
NextWave
4223
Nikko
4011, 4217
Nokia
4006, 4040
Nordmende
4001, 4006, 4007, 4010, 4052
Nova
4222
Novis
4013
Oceanic
4051
Octagon
4001, 4004, 4050
Okano
4011
Optex
4048
Optus
4204, 4213, 4222, 4223, 4246
Orbitech
4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
OSat
4004
Otto Versand
4015
Pace
4006, 4015, 4035, 4043, 4047,
4204, 4216, 4243
Pacific
4051
Packsat
4216
Palcom
4007
Palladium
4011, 4218
Palsat
4212, 4218
Panasat
4222, 4246
En
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
PCT
Philco
Philips
Phoenix
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Polsat
Predki
Premiere
Priesner
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Prosat
Proscan
Protek
Proton
Provision
Quadral
Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
Roch
Rover
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Sakura
Samsung
SAT
Sat Cruiser
Sat Partner
Sat Team
Satcom
207
4006, 4035, 4036, 4121, 4124,
4126, 4198, 4221
4006, 4219
4125
4216
4127
4110
4101
4006, 4033, 4053, 4055, 4061,
4068, 4071, 4127, 4196, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4213, 4216
4050
4006, 4005, 4048
4046, 4213
4052
4013
4048, 4213
4011
4076
4216
4006
4005, 4007
4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
4051
4016
4010
4005, 4007, 4008, 4216, 4024
4015, 4215, 4219
4052
4019
4053, 4055
4014, 4037
4004
4066, 4093, 4112, 4113, 4116,
4118, 4119, 4197, 4122, 4207
4078
4009
4008, 4024
4005, 4053, 4055
4217
4031
4024, 4217
4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
4006
4023, 4052
4050
4000, 4001, 4003, 4032, 4064,
4069, 4071, 4120, 4123, 4196,
4200
4007, 4218
4223
4001, 4004, 4010, 4013, 4049,
4218
4217
4012, 4219
Satec
Satelco
Satford
Satmaster
Satplus
Schneider
Schwaiger
SCS
Seemann
SEG
Seleco
Servi Sat
Siemens
Silva
Skantin
Skardin
Skinsat
SKR
Sky Italia
Skymaster
Skymax
SkySat
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
Sony
SR
Star Choice
Starland
Starring
Start Trak
Strong
STS
STVI
Sumida
Sunny Sound
Sunsat
Sunstar
Supermax
Tandberg
Tandy
Tantec
TCM
Techniland
TechniSat
Technology
Technosat
Technowelt
Teco
Telanor
Telasat
Telecom
Telefunken
4217
4024
4012
4012
4212
4008, 4212, 4216
4051, 4212, 4219
4215
4009, 4011, 4014
4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
4048
4031, 4217
4015
4049
4217
4009
4218
4217
4204
4005, 4017, 4022, 4212, 4217
4053, 4055
4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
4048
4212, 4217
4215, 4217
4067, 4070, 4213
4011, 4054
4019
4217
4013
4001
4001, 4004, 4008, 4024, 4049,
4222, 4246
4115
4031
4011
4024
4217
4011, 4024, 4054
4223
4052
4004
4006
4008
4012
4014, 4021, 4026, 4027, 4038,
4039, 4053, 4212, 4213, 4218
4222
4223
4219
4011, 4054
4007
4215, 4219
4217
4001, 4017, 4216
Teleka
Telemaster
TELENET
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn
Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital
Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac
4004, 4011, 4014, 4218, 4219
4010
4241
4219
4212, 4213, 4218
4006, 4218
4048
4223
4008, 4217
4006, 4020, 4052, 4058, 4208,
4213, 4215, 4216, 4217, 4219
4051
4006
4104
4196
4053
4006, 4012, 4048, 4217, 4218
4194, 4202, 4203
4049
4218
4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
4217
4214
4031, 4217
4204, 4222, 4246
4212
4070
4079, 4127
4011, 4050, 4053
4013
4015, 4215, 4219
4016
4015
4024
4053, 4055
4098
4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
4019
4001
4212
4212, 4218
4006
4006
4013
4006, 4014, 4015, 4218, 4219
4010
4216
4024
4217
4008, 4209, 4010, 4215, 4024
4102, 4107, 4195
4004
CD
Yamaha
5082, 5095, 5114
CD Recorder
Yamaha
5083
MD
Yamaha
5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha
5084, 5087
Tuner
Yamaha
5066, 5085, 5088, 5090, 5092
LD
Yamaha
2080
Amplifier
Yamaha
5098
Apple TV
Apple
2241
En
208
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 05/2017 AM-A0
YJ291A0/EN1
Download PDF

advertising